LJ5J 19A321 AB
2020 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual
ford.ca
owner.ford.com
2020 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual
December 2019
Second Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2019
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201906 20191205164712
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................9
Symbols Glossary ............................................9
Data Recording .................................................11
Perchlorate .......................................................15
Ford Credit ........................................................15
Replacement Parts Recommendation
...........................................................................16
Special Notices ...............................................16
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................17
Export Unique Options ................................18
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................19
At a Glance
Instrument Panel ..........................................20
Child Safety
General Information .....................................22
Installing Child Restraints ..........................24
Booster Seats .................................................29
Child Restraint Positioning .........................31
Child Safety Locks .........................................33
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation .................................35
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................36
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................38
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................39
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................39
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ................................................41
Seatbelt Extensions ......................................41
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .........................43
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation .................................44
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................45
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........46
Side Airbags ....................................................48
Driver Knee Airbag ........................................49
Safety Canopy™ ...........................................50
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ........51
Airbag Disposal ..............................................52
Pedestrian Protection
Pedestrian Alert System .............................53
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................54
Remote Control .............................................54
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................60
MyKey™
Principle of Operation ..................................61
Creating a MyKey ...........................................62
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................63
Checking MyKey System Status ..............63
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................64
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................64
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ...............................66
Keyless Entry ..................................................69
Liftgate
Manual Liftgate ...............................................71
Power Liftgate .................................................72
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................76
1
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................78
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...................79
Audio Control ..................................................79
Voice Control ..................................................80
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control With Stop and Go .......80
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control ..........................................................80
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control With Lane Centering
...........................................................................81
Information Display Control - Vehicles
Without: Head Up Display (HUD) .......81
Information Display Control - Vehicles
With: Head Up Display (HUD) ..............81
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................81
Horn ....................................................................82
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers .......................................83
Autowipers ......................................................83
Windshield Washers ....................................84
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........85
Lighting
General Information ....................................86
Lighting Control .............................................86
Autolamps .......................................................87
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................87
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................87
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps
..........................................................................88
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .........88
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................88
Direction Indicators ......................................89
Interior Lamps ................................................89
Ambient Lighting ..........................................90
Automatic High Beam Control
What Is Automatic High Beam Control
...........................................................................91
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off ....................................................91
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
...........................................................................91
Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................92
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................93
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................94
Interior Mirror ..................................................95
Sun Visors ........................................................96
Moonroof .........................................................96
Instrument Cluster
Gauges - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV), Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
..........................................................................98
Gauges - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV), Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
........................................................................100
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
.........................................................................103
Gauges - Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen
........................................................................104
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............106
Audible Warnings and Indicators ...........110
Information Displays
General Information .....................................111
Personalized Settings .................................116
Information Messages ................................118
Head Up Display ..........................................134
2
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control ............................137
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC) ........................................138
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC) ...............141
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Automatic
Temperature Control .............................144
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control .........................................................145
Heated Windshield .....................................146
Heated Rear Window .................................146
Heated Exterior Mirrors .............................146
Cabin Air Filter ..............................................146
Remote Start .................................................147
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................148
Head Restraints ...........................................148
Manual Seats .................................................151
Power Seats ...................................................152
Memory Function .........................................153
Rear Seats ......................................................154
Heated Seats .................................................155
Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ...............157
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ................................161
Wireless Accessory Charging ..................162
Storage Compartments
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................164
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ...................................165
Ignition Switch ..............................................165
Keyless Starting ...........................................165
Starting a Gasoline Engine ......................166
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle System
........................................................................169
Engine Block Heater .....................................171
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop ...........................................173
Hybrid Vehicle Operation ..........................174
Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation ..........176
Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked
Questions ...................................................178
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .....................................180
Fuel Quality ...................................................180
Fuel Filler Funnel Location ........................181
Running Out of Fuel ....................................181
Refueling - Excluding: Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV) ........................................183
Refueling - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV) ........................................................185
Fuel Consumption ......................................188
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................190
Catalytic Converter ......................................191
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)/
Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV)
General Information ...................................194
Charging the High Voltage Battery .......194
3
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Transmission
Automatic Transmission - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) .........202
Automatic Transmission - Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV) .......................................206
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive ................................210
Brakes
General Information ...................................215
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................215
Electric Parking Brake ................................216
Hill Start Assist ..............................................217
Auto Hold ........................................................218
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ................................221
Using Traction Control ...............................221
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ...............................222
Using Stability Control ..............................223
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ...............................224
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................224
Front Parking Aid ........................................226
Side Sensing System .................................228
Active Park Assist .......................................229
Rear View Camera ......................................232
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ..............................236
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
........................................................................236
Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........236
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................237
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................237
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................237
Adaptive Cruise Control
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go .............................................238
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Lane Centering ........................................238
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering .............................238
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go ...................................238
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering .............................239
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go ..................................240
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
and Off ........................................................242
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed ..........................................................242
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap
........................................................................243
Canceling the Set Speed .........................244
Resuming the Set Speed .........................244
Overriding the Set Speed ........................244
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering .............................245
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go ...................................245
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control .....................................245
Switching Lane Centering On and Off
........................................................................245
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting .....................................246
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ....................................................249
4
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Lane Keeping System ...............................250
Blind Spot Information System ............254
Cross Traffic Alert .......................................256
Steering ..........................................................259
Pre-Collision Assist ...................................260
Drive Mode Control
What Is Drive Mode Control ...................265
Selecting a Drive Mode ............................265
Drive Modes ..................................................265
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage ........................267
Luggage Covers ...........................................267
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............268
Load Limit .....................................................269
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................275
Trailer Sway Control ...................................276
Recommended Towing Weights ...........276
Essential Towing Checks .........................278
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
8-Speed Automatic Transmission –
8F24 ............................................................280
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
8-Speed Automatic Transmission –
8F35 .............................................................281
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
Automatic Transmission – HF45 ......281
Driving Hints
Economical Driving ....................................283
Breaking-In ....................................................283
Driving Through Water .............................284
Floor Mats .....................................................284
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance .................................286
Hazard Flashers ...........................................287
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................287
Jump Starting the Vehicle - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ........288
Jump Starting the Vehicle - Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV) .......................290
Collision, Damage or Fire Event ............293
Post-Crash Alert System .........................294
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................295
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need .............296
In California (U.S. Only) ............................297
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................298
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................299
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................299
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
.........................................................................301
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
.........................................................................301
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
.........................................................................301
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart .........................303
Changing a Fuse .........................................309
Maintenance
General Information ....................................311
Opening and Closing the Hood ...............311
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................313
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................314
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ........................315
Engine Oil Dipstick ......................................316
Engine Oil Check ..........................................316
5
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Oil Change Indicator Reset .......................317
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Excluding: Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV) ........................................................318
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.5L,
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ..........319
Engine Coolant Check ..............................320
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................324
Brake Fluid Check .......................................324
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................325
Changing the 12V Battery ........................325
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................327
Washer Fluid Check ...................................329
Fuel Filter .......................................................329
Checking the Wiper Blades .....................329
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................329
Changing a Bulb .........................................330
Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................334
Cleaning Products ......................................334
Cleaning the Exterior .................................334
Waxing ............................................................336
Cleaning the Engine ...................................336
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................336
Cleaning the Interior ...................................337
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens .......................337
Cleaning Leather Seats ............................338
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............339
Cleaning the Wheels .................................339
Vehicle Storage ...........................................339
Body Styling Kits ..........................................341
Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................342
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit ...................344
Tire Care .........................................................350
Using Summer Tires ..................................363
Using Snow Chains ....................................363
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........364
Changing a Road Wheel ..........................368
Technical Specifications ..........................374
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™
........................................................................375
Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™
........................................................................375
Engine Specifications - 2.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV) .......................376
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™ ......377
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™ .....378
Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV) ........................................379
Vehicle Identification Number ..............380
Vehicle Certification Label .......................381
Transmission Code Designation ............381
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™ ...............................................382
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™ ..............................................388
Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L,
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) .........395
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................401
Connected Vehicle
Connected Vehicle Requirements .......403
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............403
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................403
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network .....................................................403
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting
.......................................................................404
6
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
Wi-Fi Hotspot
Creating a Wi-Fi Hotspot ........................406
Changing the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name or
Password ..................................................406
Audio System
General Information ..................................407
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC ........407
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC 3 .....409
Digital Radio ...................................................411
Satellite Radio ..............................................413
USB Port .........................................................416
SYNC™
General Information ...................................417
Using Voice Recognition ...........................418
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........420
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......421
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................424
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................425
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................434
Using Voice Recognition ..........................436
Entertainment .............................................443
Phone ..............................................................452
Navigation .....................................................454
Electric Vehicle Information ...................459
Apps ................................................................465
Settings ..........................................................467
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................469
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................482
Ford Protect
Ford Protect .................................................483
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......485
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........488
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance .............................................491
Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........493
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............504
End User License Agreement .................507
Declaration of Conformity .......................532
Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles
With: SYNC 3 ............................................532
7
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Table of Contents
8
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
9
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
10
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163957
Hill descent control
E272858
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
We respect your privacy and are
committed to protecting it. The
information contained in this publication
was correct at the time of going to print,
but as technology rapidly changes, we
recommend that you visit the regional Ford
website for the latest information.
11
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have data recording functionality and
the ability to permanently or temporarily
store data. This data could include
information on the condition and status of
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance
requirements, events and malfunctions.
The types of data that can be recorded are
described in this section. Some of the data
recorded is stored in event logs or error
logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or
through a legal process. Such information
could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system
components, for example, fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example, wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
• Events or errors in essential systems,
for example, headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example, airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example,
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in
combination with other information, for
example, an accident report, damage to a
vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
be associated with a specific person.
Service Data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, for example, your contact information,
to offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, you consent that certain
diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
12
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries.
Event Data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
event data recorder is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder.
Comfort, Convenience and
Entertainment Data
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have the ability to store data based
on your personalized settings. The data is
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB
drive or digital music player. You can delete
some of this data and also choose whether
to share it through the services to which
you subscribe. See Settings (page 467).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
13
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example, account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this
data through a dedicated, protected
connection. We only collect and use data
to enable your use of our services to which
you have subscribed, with your consent or
where permitted by law. For additional
information, see the terms and conditions
of the services to which you have
subscribed.
Services That Third Parties
Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy
information for any services to which you
subscribe. We take no responsibility for
services that third parties provide.
Vehicles With a Modem (If Equipped)
The modem has a SIM. The
modem was enabled when your
vehicle was built and periodically
sends messages to stay connected to the
cell phone network, receive automatic
software updates and send vehicle-related
information to us, for example, diagnostic
information. These messages could
include information that identifies your
vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
additional information, for example, cell
phone network tower identification. For
additional information about our privacy
policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
refer to your local Ford website.
Note: The modem continues to send this
information unless you disable the modem
or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
data by changing the modem settings. See
Connected Vehicle (page 403).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example, environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With SYNC
Mobile Device Data
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can share your
vehicle data with mobile apps on your
device through the system. See Apps
(page 465).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes the vehicle identification number
of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial
number, odometer, enabled apps, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain it only as long as necessary to
provide the service, to troubleshoot, for
continuous improvement and to offer you
products and services that may be of
interest to you according to your
preferences and where allowed by law.
14
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to
that cell phone. The cell phone profile
enables more mobile features and efficient
operation. The profile contains, for
example, data from your phonebook, read
and unread text messages and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index
of supported media content. The system
also records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you use the
master reset function to erase the stored
information. See Settings (page 467).
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our
privacy policy, refer to your local Ford
website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
connectivity technology, visit
www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
or updates to the emergency call system
may also be capable of electronically or
verbally disclosing to emergency services
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
emergency services operators to provide
the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and
access to the online Account Manager tool,
visit www.ford.com/finance.
15
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, see your warranty guide that is
available online. For more information,
refer to our website and download your
copy of the warranty guide.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.
16
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of unapproved
aftermarket plug-in devices. The vehicle
Warranty will not cover damage caused
by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
and Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for
snowplowing.
Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing
package.
Using Your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an
ambulance.
Your vehicle does not have the Ambulance
Preparation Package.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
17
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
18
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
19
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E285284
Air vents.A
Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 89).B
Cruise controls. See What Is Cruise Control (page 236).C
Information Display. See General Information (page 111).D
Information display controls and audio controls. See Information Display
Control (page 81). See Audio Control (page 79).
E
Wiper lever. See Windshield Wipers (page 83).F
Touchscreen display.G
Audio unit controls. See Audio Unit (page 409).H
Hazard flasher. See Hazard Flashers (page 287).I
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator. See Front Passenger Sensing
System (page 46).
J
Glove compartment.K
Climate controls. See Automatic Climate Control (page 141).L
Push button ignition switch. See Keyless Starting (page 165).M
Horn.N
20
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on
probable child height, age and weight
thresholds, or on the minimum
requirements of the law. We recommend
that you check with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly
install the child restraint in your vehicle
and that you consult your pediatrician to
make sure you have a child restraint
appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
area. Failure to properly restrain children
in child restraints made especially for
their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
22
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended Restraint
Type
Child Size, Height, Weight, or AgeChild
Use a child restraint
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat backrest
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
child restraints for infants and toddlers
in the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 46).
• When installing a rear facing child
restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
avoid interference between the child
restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
23
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Restraints
E142594
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the child
restraint , with the tongue between the
child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
24
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
25
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
26
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seat backrest and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
attach the top tether strap to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child restraint.
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seat backrest below the symbols as
shown. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child restraints with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
27
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 in
(46 cm) apart. A child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed
at the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child restraints (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit use with the anchor
spacing stated. Do not attach a child
restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child restraint is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a proper installation.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child
restraints include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child restraint and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once you install the child restraint using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a
child restraint with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
28
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the back of the seat. For the
outermost seating positions, route the
tether strap under the head restraint
and between the head restraint posts.
For the center seating positions, route
the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint. If needed, you can also
remove the head restraints.
E305488
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol.
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system has a tether strap, and the child
restraint manufacturer recommends
its use, we also recommend its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
29
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
30
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint
device is appropriate for your child's size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions and
31
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the instructions
and warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
32
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined
Weight of
Child and
Child
Restraint
Restraint
Type
Seatbelt
Only
Seatbelt
and LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
Seatbelt
and Top
Tether
Anchor
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
Only)
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
148).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, you cannot open
the rear doors from the inside.
33
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
E300933
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of
each rear door. You must set the child
safety lock separately on each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to switch the child
lock on and counter clockwise to switch it
off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key counter clockwise to switch
the child lock on and clockwise to switch
it off.
34
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always
be properly restrained.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and
one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
belt under the arm. Never use a single
seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats
may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outermost
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
outermost and second row outermost
seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outermost passenger seating position.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
35
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. The
pretensioners may also activate when a
Safety Canopy airbag deploys.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
E142589
When in use, place the rear seatbelts in the
belt guides on the outermost seat
backrests.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
36
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in
a rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 22).
37
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. Allow the belt to retract. As the
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seatbelt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and turn on the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
How to Extract Seatbelts in the
Rear Outermost Positions
Seatbelts in the rear outermost positions
can lock if you firmly return the seat
backrest to its upright position. You can
unlock the seatbelts using the following
procedures.
For vehicles where the rear seats recline:
1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline
position.
2. The seatbelt should then unlock.
3. Return the seat backrest to its desired
upright position.
For vehicles with rear seats that do not
recline or are locked with the seat in its full
rear recline position:
1. Grasp the seatbelt webbing at the top
of the seat backrest.
2. Pull the seatbelt webbing forward,
firmly.
3. After pulling the seatbelt forward,
allow the seatbelt to feed back into the
seatbelt retractor as much as possible.
If necessary, press the seat backrest
down to allow the seatbelt webbing to
retract further.
4. The seatbelt should then unlock.
5. If the seatbelt does not unlock, repeat
steps 1-3.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury in
a crash.
38
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
E87511
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the indicator chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic-
ator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
WARNING: The system will only
provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
This system monitors all seating positions
and provides audio and graphic feedback.
E71880
This lamp illuminates and a
warning tone sounds if you do
not fasten your seatbelt when
you switch the ignition on. The lamp and
tone switch off when you fasten your
seatbelt or about one minute has elapsed.
39
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front passenger. This lamp
illuminates and a warning tone sounds if
you or your front passenger do not fasten
the seatbelt buckle and the vehicle speed
exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h). To deactivate
the warning, see Deactivating and
Activating the Belt-Minder Feature.
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do
not place large objects on the seat.
E206718
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the ignition on, identifying
the number of seating positions
with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
when a seating position changes from
unfastened to fastened.
E283584
This warning displays and a tone sounds
if an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt
buckle or it becomes unfastened.
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
to begin with, the warning will not display.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
warning lamp.
Seatbelt Status
E281361
E274703
Seatbelt fastened.A
Seatbelt not fastened.B
Seatbelt recently unfastened.C
FaultD
To view the seatbelt status, use the
information display controls on the
steering wheel.
Deactivating and Activating the
Seatbelt Reminder (Front Seats Only)
WARNING: While the system
allows you to deactivate it, this system
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others
who may use the vehicle.
40
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this terminates the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 before starting the
procedure.
Make sure that:
• You set the parking brake.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• You close all vehicle doors.
• You unbuckle the driver and front
passenger seatbelts.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
seatbelt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lamp
turns on.
4. When the seatbelt warning lamp is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp
flashes for confirmation.
• This switches the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This switches the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 334).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into
the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
41
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
model year and seating position. The use
of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position
may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits
across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
extensions made by the original equipment
seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
42
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Passenger seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning lamp and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, driver
seat position sensor, front passenger
sensing system and indicators.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
43
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag
module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
44
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
45
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Always sit upright
against your seatback with your feet on
the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E181984
46
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The indicators are on the center stack of
the instrument panel.
The front passenger sensing system uses
passenger airbag status indicators that
illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled).
Note: The indicators illuminate briefly when
you first switch the ignition on to confirm
they are functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status off indicator
illuminates and stays lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal airbag
is disabled.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status on
indicator illuminates, then switch the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status on indicator
illuminates and remains illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
is disabled, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat backrest in an
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to
detect that person and enables the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the passenger airbag status off
indicator remains lit even after this,
advise the person to ride in the rear
seat.
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
Disabled
OFF: Lit
Empty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
47
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
ON: Unlit
Enabled
OFF: Unlit
Adult
ON: Lit
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat backrest,
and centered on the seat cushion, with
their feet comfortably extended on the
floor. Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator is incorrect, check for
the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat.
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in
the list above.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 51).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of
the side airbags and increase the risk of
injury in an accident.
48
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of each front and rear seat backrest. In
certain sideways crashes or rollover events,
the side airbags will be inflated. The airbag
was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the
protection provided occupants in side
impact crashes.
E152533
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The rear side airbag
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat.
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests, as well as
side airbags inside of each outermost
rear seat backrest.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
51).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG
A driver's knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
driver's knee airbag based on crash severity
and occupant conditions. Under certain
crash and occupant conditions, the driver’s
knee airbag may deploy but the driver’s
front airbag may not activate. As with front
and side airbags, it is important to be
properly seated and restrained to reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
E67017
Make sure the knee airbag is
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 51).
49
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
headliner at the siderail that may come
into contact with a deploying curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could
injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 51).
50
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the seatbelt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags and the Safety Canopy. Based on
the type of crash, the restraints control
module deploys the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
• The readiness light will not illuminate
immediately after you switch the
ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
• A series of five beeps is heard. The tone
pattern repeats periodically until the
problem, the light or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The restraint system is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
conditions sufficient to cause the restraint
control module to deploy a safety device.
51
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that not all the safety devices
activate for all occupants in a crash does
not mean something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, type of crash,
belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The front airbags are designed to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The front seatbelt pretensioners are
designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers. The rear seatbelt
pretensioners are designed to activate
in frontal crashes and in rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
• The side airbags are designed to inflate
in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if your
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
• The Safety Canopy is designed to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if your vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
52
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
PEDESTRIAN ALERT SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system is not
designed to detect cyclists,
motorcyclists, pedestrians or animals.
Always drive with due care and attention.
Failure to take care may result in a crash.
Due to the quiet operation of hybrid and
electric vehicles at low speeds, the system
creates a subtle sound to alert pedestrians.
The system is on when your vehicle is
running and not in park (P). Some sound
may be audible in the passenger
compartment.
53
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Pedestrian Protection
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 54).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
54
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E191532
Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E305198
Your remote control operates the power
locks and the remote start system. The
key must be in your vehicle to use the push
button start.
Removable Key Blade
Your remote control also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
55
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E305199
Press the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away
from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of remote control batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
remote control should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
118).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E191533
56
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E305199
1. Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.
57
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the remote control and install the
key blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
58
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust
fumes, do not use remote start if your
vehicle is parked indoors or in areas that
are not well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
remote control.
This feature allows you to start your engine
without entering the vehicle. The remote
control has an extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 137). A manual
climate control system runs at the setting
it was set to when you switched your
vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The alarm system triggers.
• You disable the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
• The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback (If
Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful
Solid red
Request failed or
status not received
Blinking red
Status incompleteBlinking green
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: Press each button on your remote
control within three seconds of each other.
If you do not follow this sequence, your
vehicle does not start remotely, the direction
indicators do not flash twice and the horn
does not sound.
E138626
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on.
Quiet start runs the blower fan at a slower
speed to reduce noise. You can switch it
on or off in the information display.
59
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: If you have remote started your
vehicle with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, switch on the ignition before
driving your vehicle. With an intelligent
access transmitter, press the Start/Stop
button on the instrument panel once while
applying the brake pedal before driving your
vehicle.
The power windows and radio functions
have been disabled during remote start.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if the vehicle has run from
the first remote start for five minutes, the
vehicle continues to run now for a total of
30 minutes. You can extend the remote
start up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps
turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running
vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
Linking a Preset Position to Your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can program your intelligent access
key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 153).
If programmed to a pre-set position, the
remote control recalls memory positions
when you unlock your vehicle. If you have
the easy entry and exit feature enabled
and the ignition is off, the seat moves to
the easy entry position.
The seat moves to the driver memory
position when you switch the ignition on.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
60
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the
following settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
when you use the MyKey system. For
example, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning or forward collision
warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be
able to turn the lane departure warning
feature off, but this feature turns back
on automatically with every new key
cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in
some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.
61
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing
choices to switch them on or off, or to select
a more specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a
safe speed considering posted speed
limits and prevailing road conditions. The
driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not limit.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's
control to switch it off. When selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control (if your vehicle
has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the touchscreen to create a MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle has a
push-button start, place the remote
control into the backup slot. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
166).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu in the
touchscreen and then scroll through
the menus to change the settings of
your MyKey. From the MyKey menu
select the option Create MyKey. See
Settings (page 467).
62
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
MyKey™
4. When prompted, hold the OK button
until you see a message informing you
to label this key as a MyKey. The
programmed restrictions apply when
you key off, open and close the driver
door and restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or remote control.
You have successfully created a MyKey.
Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See Programming
and Changing Configurable Settings.
Programming and Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the touchscreen to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or remote control you want to
program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See Settings
(page 467).
3. Follow the instructions in the
touchscreen. The programmed
restrictions apply when you switch the
vehicle off, open and close the driver
door and restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or remote control.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings. When you make any
changes to your MyKey settings, you change
the settings for every MyKey. You cannot
make individual changes to apply to certain
MyKeys.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the touchscreen.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the
touchscreen and then scroll through
the menus to begin clearing your
MyKey programming. See Settings
(page 467).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
touchscreen. See Settings (page 467).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
63
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
MyKey™
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys you have
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
you have deleted all MyKeys.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys you have
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential causesCondition
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup slot.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
166).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 62).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 62).
64
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
MyKey™
Potential causesCondition
· Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
166).
I lost a key.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
65
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Note: Always take your keys and lock all
doors when leaving your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E210170
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators flash.
With the ignition off, press and hold both
the lock and unlock buttons on the remote
control for three seconds to change
between driver door or all door unlock
mode. The direction indicators flash twice
to indicate a change to the unlocking
mode. Driver door mode only unlocks the
driver door when you press the unlock
button once. All door mode unlocks all
doors when you press the unlock button
once. The unlocking mode applies to the
remote control, keyless entry keypad and
intelligent access.
To change these settings, use the
touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
467).
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Locks.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn will
sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn will sound
twice and the direction indicators will not
flash. You can switch this feature on or off
from the vehicle tile in SYNC 3. See
Settings (page 467).
Opening the Power Liftgate
E306276
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade (If Equipped)
If the central locking function does not
operate, lock the doors using the key blade
in the door handle lock cylinder.
66
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
E310901
Locking with the Key Blade
Insert the key blade into the driver door
handle lock cylinder, turn the key up
toward the front of your vehicle to lock.
Unlocking with the Key Blade
Insert the key blade into the driver door
handle lock cylinder, turn the key down
toward the rear of your vehicle to unlock.
Opening a Rear Door from the
Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 54).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248553
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248554
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
67
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
At the Liftgate
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
• Pressing the lock button on the
transmitter even if the doors are not
closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area. When you electronically
lock your vehicle with any door open, the
transmission is in park (P) and the ignition
is off, the system searches for an intelligent
access key inside your vehicle after you
close the last door. If the system finds a
key, all of the doors will immediately
unlock and the horn will sound twice,
indicating that a key is inside.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if
the ignition is on.
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
12 mph (20 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle had been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
To enable or disable autounlock, use the
vehicle tile in SYNC 3. See Settings (page
467).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
68
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it turns off 30 minutes after
you close all of the doors.
KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and
then it lights up so you can see and touch
the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors
• program and erase user codes
• arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own five-digit personal entry
codes.
Creating a personal entry code using
the keypad
1. Enter the factory-set code
69
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must enter each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a personal entry code using the
Keypad
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Creating a personal entry code using
the touchscreen
You can create or erase your own personal
entry code through your touchscreen
settings. See Settings (page 467).
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the
remote control
• switching the ignition on
• unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is disabled. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 66).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
70
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
MANUAL LIFTGATE
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the liftgate,
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening with the Outside Control
Button
E138632
Press the control button to unlatch the
liftgate and then lift to open.
Opening with the Remote Control
(If Equipped)
E267940
Press the button to unlock the
liftgate. The liftgate unlocks for
45 seconds, during which time
you can open the liftgate using the outside
control button.
Closing the Liftgate
E291353
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
71
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Liftgate
POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the liftgate,
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent passengers
and cargo from falling out. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all
times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
If there is a problem with the open or close
request, a tone sounds for one of the
following reasons:
• The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The liftgate is not fully closed and your
vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. If the liftgate continues to close
after opening, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. Remove any
excessive weight from the liftgate.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area
before using the power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
for example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
72
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Liftgate
Opening from the Instrument Panel
E138633
With the transmission in park
(P), press the button on the
instrument panel.
Opening with the Remote Control
E267940
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Opening with the Outside Control
Button
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of
the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks when
you press the liftgate release button.
E138632
2. Press and release the liftgate control
button.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Keep clear of the
liftgate when using the rear switch.
E291351
Press and release the liftgate button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.*
*This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when
it reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
73
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Liftgate
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until you hear a
tone, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height until you reprogram it,
even if you disconnect the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
fully open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
Obstacle Detection
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
reverses to open. Once you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.
Switching the Power Liftgate On
or Off
You can switch the power liftgate on or off
through the vehicle settings on your
touchscreen.
When switched off, the liftgate only
unlatches and will not power open or close.
Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)
Make sure you have the passive key within
3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
E300799
3. The liftgate opens or closes.
Avoid the following actions when using the
hands-free opening feature:
• Making physical contact with the
bumper.
• Holding your foot under the bumper.
• Sweeping your foot from side to side,
or kicking at an odd angle.
74
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Liftgate
Detection Zones
Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch
E310717
The detection area is in the center of the
rear bumper.
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch
E310718
The detection area is on the left-hand side
and right-hand side of the hitch, between
the exhaust and the hitch.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
passive key away from the rear bumper
detection area when you wash your vehicle.
75
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Liftgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems could result in engine
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain could result in vehicle starting
problems, especially if they are too close to
the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent
these objects from touching the coded key
when starting your vehicle. If a problem
occurs, switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart your vehicle.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with
a coded key, it is not operating correctly.
A message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts your
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and turns on the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your coded keys are lost or stolen and
you do not have an extra coded key, you
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of four
coded keys to your vehicle. All four can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
This procedure programs both the vehicle
immobilizer keycode and the remote
control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible.
If two previously programmed keys are not
available, contact an authorized dealer to
have the spare key programmed.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
76
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Security
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds,
but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After at least 3 seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds,
but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After at least 3 seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If you have successfully programmed the
new integrated keyhead transmitter, it will
start your vehicle and operate the remote
entry system.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 9. If
you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
coded keys to your vehicle. Make all four
intelligent access keys.
You can program your own intelligent
access keys to your vehicle. This procedure
programs both the vehicle immobilizer
keycode and the remote control to your
vehicle.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access key readily accessible.
If two previously programmed keys are not
available, contact an authorized dealer to
have the spare key programmed.
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Carry out all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you carry
out any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E306769
1. Remove the mat covering the backup
location.
2. Center the first programmed intelligent
access key in the backup location.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place and center a
second programmed intelligent access
key in the backup location.
7. Press the push button ignition switch.
77
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Security
8. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
9. Remove the intelligent access key.
10. Within 10 seconds, center the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup location.
11. Press the push button ignition switch.
Keep the ignition on for at least six
seconds.
12. Remove the newly programmed
intelligent access key.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 12. If
programming remains unsuccessful,
contact an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock
the vehicle to arm the alarm.
The message indicator flashes
when theft protection is active.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
78
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 148).
E279960
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E279962
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
E280796
E280795
79
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
You can operate the following
functions with the control:
E280802
Press to decrease volume level.
E280803
Press to increase volume level.
E268549
Press to silence the current
media
Press to access phone mode or
to answer a phone call.
E265040
Press to end a phone call.
E265045
Press to access the previous
media selection.
E265044
Press to access the next media
selection.
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E142599
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
E289570
See What Is Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go (page 238).
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
E280796
See What Is Cruise Control (page 236).
80
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE
CENTERING
E280798
See What Is Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering (page 238).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITHOUT: HEAD UP DISPLAY
(HUD)
E280795
See Information Displays (page 111).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD)
E285282
See Information Displays (page 111).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
The heated steering wheel button is on the
climate controls.
Press the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
81
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
HORN
E270945
82
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
E270969
Push the lever up or down to
operate the windshield wipers.
E295996
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Intermittent Wipe
E295997
Shortest wipe interval.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Longest wipe interval.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
83
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wipers and Washers
E295997
High sensitivity.A
Autowipers On.B
Low sensitivity.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Autowipers Settings
Autowipers defaults to on and remains on
until you switch it off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E242323
E270967
Pull the lever toward you to
operate the windshield washers.
When you release the lever, the wipers
operate for a short time. When activated,
a courtesy wipe occurs a short time after
the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or
off in the touchscreen. See Settings (page
467).
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This could
cause the washer pump to overheat.
84
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wipers and Washers
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also turns
on the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
E242324
C
Intermittent wipe.A
Continuous wipe.B
Rear window wiper off.C
Depending on your vehicle, when you
switch on the front wipers and move the
gearshift lever to reverse (R), the rear
intermittent wipe may turn on.
Note: Make sure you switch the rear
window wiper off before entering a car
wash.
Rear Window Washer
E242432
Push the lever away from you to operate
the rear window washer. When you release
the lever, the wipers operate for a short
time.
Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.
85
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
Lighting Control Selections
E281337
Turn the dial to make a selection.
Note: The indicator illuminates next to the
active selection.
E265031
Lamps off.
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
E281240
Autolamps.
E270968
Headlamps on.
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps every time you switch your
vehicle on.
Switching High Beam Headlamps
On and Off
E248603
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
86
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Lighting
Flashing High Beam Headlamps
E248604
Pull the lever toward you and release it to
flash the high beam headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low
light situations or when the wipers operate.
E281240
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your
vehicle on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the touchscreen to adjust the period of
time that the headlamps remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
E291299
E296433
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY (IF
EQUIPPED)
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
87
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH:
CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the touchscreen:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
467).
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. You switch the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to any position except
headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On
or Off
Only switch the front fog lamps on during
reduced visibility.
You can switch the front fog lamps on if
any of the following occur:
• You set the lighting control to the
parking lamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
headlamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position and the headlamps
are on.
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
control.
Press the button to switch the
front fog lamps on or off.
88
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Lighting
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Switching the Direction Indicators
On and Off
E242676
Push the lever up or down to switch the
direction indicators on.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
Set the lever to the middle position to
switch the direction indicators off.
Direction Indicator
Flashes when you switch the
direction indicators on.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
warns of a failed indicator bulb.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
On
Fully press the button on the
overhead console towards the
icon.
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
Off
Fully press the button on the
overhead console towards the
icon.
Interior Lamp Function
Switching the Interior Lamp Function
On
The switch is on the overhead console.
E299443
Set the switch to the middle position.
When you switch the interior lamp function
on, the interior lamps turn on if:
• You open a door.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition off.
89
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Lighting
Switching the Front Interior Lamps
On and Off
E249791
Press the edge of the lamp lens.
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps
On and Off
Press the edge of the lamp lens.
Note: If the rear lamps are switched on
through the overhead console, you cannot
switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
Select Vehicle.
Select Ambient Light.
E306304
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Drag the slider above zero brightness.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the slider left or right.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Drag the slider left to zero brightness.
90
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Lighting
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns the high beams
off. Low beams remain on.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Lighting.
Activating the Automatic High
Beam Control
E281240
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See
Autolamps (page 87).
Note: The lighting control defaults to
autolamps each time you switch your
vehicle on.
When active, the high beams turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
When active, the high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
Note: High beam reactivation may be
delayed in certain curvy road situations.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL INDICATORS
The indicator illuminates to
confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
91
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Automatic High Beam Control
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
HIGH BEAM CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
E248603
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
92
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Automatic High Beam Control
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
Press the control to open the
window. Lift the control to close
the window.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when
just one window is open, slightly open the
opposite window.
One-Touch Down (If Equipped)
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up (If Equipped)
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Up
Start the engine.
1. Lift and hold the window switch until
you fully close the door window.
Continue to hold the switch for a few
seconds after you close the window.
2. Release the window switch.
3. Press and hold the window switch until
you fully open the door window.
4. Release the window switch.
5. Lift and hold the window switch until
you fully close the window.
6. Test for correct window operation by
carrying out the one-touch down and
one-touch up features.
Rear Window Lock
Press the control to lock or
unlock the rear window controls.
It illuminates when you lock the
rear window controls.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window stops and reverses if it detects
an obstruction.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
care when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Resetting Bounce-Back
WARNING: Bounce-back is off until
you reset the memory. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal
injury or damage to your vehicle.
If you have disconnected the battery, you
must reset the bounce-back memory
separately for each window.
1. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
2. Release the switch.
93
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
3. Lift and hold the switch again for a few
seconds.
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift and hold the switch again for a few
seconds.
6. Release the switch.
7. Press and hold the switch until the
window is fully open.
8. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
9. Release the switch.
10. Open the window and then try to
close it using one-touch close.
Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close when you use one-touch.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window controls for
several minutes after switching off the
ignition or until opening either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
E303926
Left-hand mirrorA
Right-hand mirrorB
E303927
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
94
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors fold in toward the
glass after you place the transmission into
park (P), turn off the vehicle, open and
close the driver side door and lock the
vehicle. The exterior mirrors unfold and
return to their driving position after you
unlock the vehicle and open and close the
driver side door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 111).
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
on the door. The control lights and the
mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press the
control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light turns off.
Note: If you use the power-folding control
to fold the mirrors on demand with the auto
fold feature on, you must use the control
again to unfold them.
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time you manually
fold the mirrors.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 146).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 153).
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the turn
signal.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 254).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
95
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Manual Dimming Mirror
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the moonroof. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
roof opening.
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are
located on the overhead console.
The moonroof and sunscreen have a
one-touch open and close feature. To stop
them during one-touch operation, press
the control a second time.
96
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E303933
Moonroof open. Press and
release to open the moonroof.
A
Moonroof vent/close. Press
and release to vent or close the
moonroof.
B
Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
closed.
C
Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
D
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the control again.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
Press and hold the front of the control
within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override this function. While
bounce-back is active, the closing force
increases for each of the next three times
that you close the moonroof.
97
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES - PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV),
VEHICLES WITH: 6.5 INCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY SCREEN
Note: Displays may appear slightly different
depending on region.
E307890
Power gauge.A
Information bar.B
Speedometer.C
Fuel gauge.D
Battery gauge and vehicle driving range.E
Information display.F
Engine coolant temperature gauge.G
98
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Power Gauge
The Power Gauge displays power to the
wheels in kW when accelerating or
maintaining speed. When slowing down
by lifting your foot off the accelerator pedal
or pressing the brake the gauge displays
the power captured by the regenerative
braking system and returned to the high
voltage battery.
Information Bar
Displays information related to the
navigation, outside air temperature,
odometer and distance to empty.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Battery Gauge
The high voltage battery gauge displays
the total amount of charge associated with
your available electric only driving range.
A full fill represents the total amount of
energy you can get from an external charge
(plugging your vehicle in). When the fill
reaches empty the powertrain system
automatically switches to hybrid operation.
See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation
(page 176).
Vehicle Driving Range
E308653
Vehicle range indicates the estimated
distance your vehicle can travel with the
energy currently onboard. Estimates vary
based on the energy used while driving.
Changes in driving pattern can cause the
values to not only decrease but also
increase or stay constant for periods of
time.
The amount of energy being used while
driving is affected by:
• Mild or aggressive acceleration or
braking.
• Your vehicle speed.
• Use of accessories such as climate
control.
• Ambient temperature and other
weather conditions.
• Driving in a city or on a highway.
• Driving on hilly road conditions.
99
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Note: It is normal for vehicle range
estimates to vary due to changes in average
energy usage. This is why you typically see
different range estimates each time you fill
up your fuel tank or fully charge your battery.
Gasoline Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank.
Electric Range
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on electric power only
with the engine off.
Information Display
Information that appears depends on your
vehicle settings. See General
Information (page 111).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
GAUGES - PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV),
VEHICLES WITH: 12.3 INCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY SCREEN
Note: Displays may appear slightly different
depending on region or your personal
settings.
100
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
G
E320093
Coolant temperature gauge.A
Speedometer.B
Information bar.C
Information display.D
Battery gauge and vehicle driving range.E
Power gauge.F
Fuel gauge.G
Information Bar
Displays information related to the current
audio source, navigation, outside air
temperature and distance to empty.
Information Display
Information that appears depends on
current gauge view and on-demand
settings. See General Information (page
111).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
101
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Battery Gauge
The high voltage battery gauge displays
the total amount of charge associated with
your available electric only driving range.
A full fill represents the total amount of
energy you can get from an external charge
(plugging your vehicle in). When the fill
reaches empty the powertrain system
automatically switches to hybrid operation.
See Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation
(page 176).
Vehicle Driving Range
E308653
Vehicle range indicates the estimated
distance your vehicle will travel with the
energy currently onboard. Estimates will
vary based on the energy used while
driving.
Changes in driving pattern can cause the
values to not only decrease but also
increase or stay constant for periods of
time.
The amount of energy being used while
driving is affected by:
• Mild or aggressive acceleration or
braking.
• Your vehicle speed.
• Use of accessories such as climate
control.
• Ambient temperature and other
weather conditions.
• Driving in a city or on a highway.
• Driving on hilly road conditions.
Note: It is normal for vehicle range
estimates to vary due to changes in average
energy usage. This is why you typically see
different range estimates each time you fill
up your fuel tank or fully charge your battery.
Gasoline Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank.
102
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Electric Range
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on electric power only
with the engine off.
Power Gauge
The Power Gauge displays power to the
wheels in kW when accelerating or
maintaining speed. The high voltage
battery power and engine power
contributions are distinguished by color
and added together to indicate total power
to the wheels. When slowing down by
lifting your foot off the accelerator pedal
or pressing the brake, the power captured
by the regenerative braking system and
returned to the high voltage battery is
displayed in green.
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY SCREEN
E282227
Tachometer.A
Information display.B
Speedometer.C
Fuel gauge.D
Engine coolant temperature gauge.E
103
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Information Display
Information that appears depends on your
vehicle settings. See General
Information (page 111).
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH:
12.3 INCH INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER DISPLAY SCREEN
Note: Displays may appear slightly different
depending on region or your personal
settings.
104
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
E320077
Coolant temperature gauge.A
Speedometer.B
Information bar.C
Information display.D
Tachometer.E
Fuel gauge.F
Information Bar
Displays information related to the current
audio source, navigation, outside air
temperature and distance to empty.
Information Display
Information that appears depends on
current gauge view and on-demand
settings. See General Information (page
111).
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
105
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods
of time.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in. See What Is Adaptive Cruise
Control With Stop and Go (page 238).
On (white light): Illuminates when you
switch on the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
you engage the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when you disengage the
speed control system.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a system
error. You continue to have the
normal braking (without ABS) unless the
brake system warning lamp also
illuminates. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Automatic High Beam Control
Illuminates when this feature is
on. See Switching Automatic
High Beam Control On and Off
(page 91).
Auto Hold Active
E197933
E322410
Illuminates when the system
holds your vehicle stationary.
106
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Auto Hold Unavailable
E197934
E322411
Illuminates when the system is
on, but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
Auto-Start-Stop
Illuminates to inform you when
the engine shuts down or in
conjunction with a message.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a system error. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor
E151262
Illuminates when you switch this
feature off or in conjunction with
a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 254).
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and
illuminates when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates when you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Make sure
the parking brake is off. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as
possible if the lamp continues to
illuminate.
Cruise Control
E71340
Illuminates when you switch this
feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard flasher. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burned out bulb. See Changing a
Bulb (page 330).
Door Ajar
Illuminates when the ignition is
on and any door is not
completely closed.
Electric Park Brake
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
E146190
Illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
system error. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 216).
107
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine or Motor Coolant
Temperature
Illuminates when the engine or
motor coolant temperature is
high. Stop your vehicle as soon
as possible, switch your vehicle off and let
it cool. See Engine Coolant Check (page
320).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a system error.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 316).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately.
EV Charge
E281479
Illuminates when you switch on
this feature. See Plug-In Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 176).
EV Later
E281477
Illuminates when you switch on
this feature. See Plug-In Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 176).
EV Now
E281476
Illuminates when you switch on
this feature. See Plug-In Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 176).
Fasten Seatbelt
E71880
Illuminates and a tone sounds
to remind you to fasten your
seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 39).
Fasten Rear Seatbelt
E206718
Illuminates and a tone sounds
to signal the rear seatbelts are
not fastened.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
there is a system error. Have the system
checked.
Front Fog Lamps
Illuminates when you switch the
front fog lamps on.
High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E246598
Illuminates when the ignition is
on and the hood is not
completely closed.
Lamps On
Illuminates when you switch the
low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps on.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Illuminates when the liftgate is
not completely closed.
108
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Beam Warning
E181350
Illuminates when the low beam
headlamp bulb is not functioning
properly.
Low Fuel Level
Illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check the tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or a
4WD/AWD fault. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Ready to Drive
E224090
Illuminates when you have
switched on the vehicle and it is
ready to drive. A corresponding
message may appear stating ready to
drive.
Service Engine Soon
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on prior to engine
start to check the bulb and to
indicate whether your vehicle is ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
system errors are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Catalytic Converter (page 191).
If it illuminates when the engine is running
this indicates a system error. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected an error
in the vehicle emission control system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Continuing to drive your vehicle
may cause reduced power or the engine
to stop. Failure to respond to the warning
lamp may cause component damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Stability Control
E138639
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
system error. During a system error the
system switches off. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 223).
Stability Control Off
E130458
Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It goes out when you
switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 223).
109
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Stop Safely Now
E144693
Illuminates if your vehicle has an
electrical component fault or
failure that will cause your
vehicle to shutdown or enter into a limited
operating mode. You may also see a
message.
Vehicle Plugged in
E228962
Illuminates when your vehicle is
plugged in. A corresponding
message may display after
attempting to start your vehicle.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning (If Equipped)
Sounds when you open the driver door and
you have left the key in the ignition.
Keyless Warning
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the remote control, after the
last door is closed and your keyless vehicle
is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
110
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the quick action menu (QAM)
buttons on the right-hand side of the
steering wheel. The information display
provides the corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
A B C
E250032
Return button.A
OK button.B
Menu button.C
Return Button
Use the return button to go back or to exit.
OK Button
Use the OK button to make a selection.
You can also use it to scroll through a
menu.
Menu Button
Use the menu button on the main screen
to display the submenu.
4 Inch Display Menu
E204495
This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
111
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Trip Menu
Trip Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Select Your SettingReset Individual Values
Select Your SettingConfigure View
• Trip Odometer - Registers the distance traveled of individual journeys or the total
distance since the function was last reset.
• Trip Timer - Registers the elapsed time of individual journeys or the total time since
the function was last reset.
• Average Fuel - Indicates the average fuel consumption of individual journeys or the
average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.
• Average Speed - Indicates the average vehicle speed of individual journeys or the
average vehicle speed since the function was last reset.
• Distance to Empty - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on
the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not
only decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset your trip information.
MyView
MyView
Digital Speedometer
Fuel Economy
Trip/Audio
Eco Coach
Calm Screen
Driver Assist.
Driver Assist.
Select Your SettingEco Coach
112
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Navigation
Navigation
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 434).
Audio
Audio
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 434).
Phone
Phone
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 434).
Settings
Settings
Contains vehicle status information.
Select Your Setting.
Information
Select Your SettingLanguageDisplay
Measure unit
Temperature unit
Tire Pressure
Select Your SettingDriver Assistance
Select Your SettingOil LevelVehicle Maintenance
Oil Life
Brake Fluid Life
Tire Pressure
MyKey InfoMyKey
Create MyKey
113
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Note: Additional vehicle settings are
available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 467).
6 and 12 Inch Display Menu
E204495
This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
Select Screens
Select Screens
Menu options covered in Personalized Settings. See Personalized Settings (page
116).
Audio
Audio
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 434).
Navigation
Navigation
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 434).
Phone
Phone
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 434).
114
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Settings
Brake Coach
Percent Oil Life Indication XXX%
Hold Ok to Reset
Oil Life
Hold Ok to ResetTire Monitor
Hold Ok to InitializeNeutral Tow
Note: Additional vehicle settings are
available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 467).
Display Setup
Display Setup
Show Tachometer
3
Show Power Gauge
4
Speedometer Units
Select Your Setting
Eco Coach
1
Hold OK to Reset
Driving History
2
1
12 inch display only
2
Hybrid only
3
12 inch display and non-hybrid only
4
12 inch display and hybrid only
Note: Additional display settings are
available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 467).
Hybrid Display Information (If
Equipped)
Unique hybrid vehicle information displays
on your information display when you shut
off your vehicle or come to a stop.
Brake Coach
The Brake Coach appears after the vehicle
has come to a stop. It coaches you to brake
in a manner that maximizes the amount
of energy returned through the
regenerative braking system.
115
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
The percent displayed is an indication of
the regenerative braking efficiency with
100% representing the maximum amount
of energy recovery. Brake Coach can be
turned on or off in the settings menu.
Trip Summary
The trip summary displays upon shutting
off your vehicle. The values are cumulative
since you last started your vehicle.
The information shown is the same as the
This Trip on demand screen. See
Personalized Settings (page 116).
Vehicle Charging Status
For plug-in vehicles only, vehicle charging
status displays when you shut off your
vehicle, and when you turn on your vehicle
while plugged in. Charging status includes
the charge start or charge end time as
appropriate. You can modify your vehicle's
charge settings through the touchscreen.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Select one of these options to display on
your main screen.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: EV Now information is only available
when in EV Now mode.
Select Screens
Calm Screen
Fuel Economy
Trip 1
Trip 2
This Trip
3
EV Coach
3
Electric Efficiency
3
Eco Coach
1
Eco Behavior
2
Tire Pressure
Intelligent AWD
Off Road
Trailer Light Check
116
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Select Screens
Seatbelts
Auto StartStop
4
Now Playing
EV Now
3
1
6 inch display only
2
12 inch display only
3
Hybrid only
4
Non-hybrid only
After making your selection
• Some features offer more information by pressing the OK button.
• You can also hold OK to reset your fuel economy and trip 1 and 2.
Fuel Economy
An Instant Fuel Economy gauge is provided
along with average fuel economy. Average
fuel economy is continuously averaged
since the last reset.
Hybrid features:
• When the gasoline engine is off the
instant fuel economy gauge is replaced
with a electric driving message.
• For Plug-in vehicles, both electric only
and hybrid operation are included in
the calculation. More electric only
driving will result in greater average fuel
economy.
While viewing this screen you can reset
your average fuel economy by pressing and
holding OK.
Trip 1 and 2
Provides trip timer, trip average fuel
economy and total trip distance traveled.
For hybrid vehicles, the trip also shows the
distance traveled on electric power only.
Hybrid Information (If Equipped)
This Trip
Provides trip timer, trip average fuel
economy, total trip distance traveled, and
distance traveled on electric power only
with the engine off. If the gasoline engine
has not turned on during the trip then trip
average fuel economy is not shown. This
Trip automatically resets each time you
start your vehicle.
EV Coach
EV Coach can help you to get the most out
of your vehicle’s electric driving and
regenerative braking capabilities.
When you are accelerating or maintaining
speed you will see a blue or white solid bar
indicating vehicle power. You may also see
a blue rectangular box which shows the
power level at which the engine will turn
on.
117
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
• When your power level is within the box
the color of the bar will be blue. This
means you are in Electric operation and
the engine is off.
• When your power level is outside of the
box the color of the bar will be white.
This means you are in Hybrid operation
with a combination of the electric
motor and the engine providing vehicle
power.
When you are decelerating with either your
foot off the accelerator pedal or on the
brake pedal you will see a green or white
solid bar indicating the power being used
to slow down the vehicle. You may also
see a green rectangular box which shows
the amount of power that can be
recaptured by the regenerative braking
system and returned to the high voltage
battery.
• When your power level is completely
within the box the color of the bar will
be all green. This means that the
regenerative braking system is being
used to efficiently slow the vehicle
down and return the maximum
percentage of energy to the high
voltage battery.
• When your power level is outside of the
green box then the bar will be white.
This means that both the regenerative
braking system and conventional
braking system are being used.
Electric Efficiency
Note: This feature applies to Plug-in
vehicles only.
This screen shows your average driving
distance per kWh of electricity used on
your plug-in hybrid vehicle. The value is
calculated only when your available
electric range is being used and the
gasoline engine is off.
Distance per full charge is also shown. This
is an estimate of the electric range you
would have if you plugged in and fully
charged your vehicle right now. The higher
your electric efficiency, the higher your
distance per full charge.
Your electric efficiency is affected by your
driving style and route, climate control use,
outside temperature and other factors.
Best efficiency is achieved in mild ambient
temperatures with mild to moderate
acceleration and braking, moderate speeds
and low climate control usage.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Depending on your vehicle options and
instrument cluster type, not all messages
display or are available.
Note: The system abbreviates or shortens
certain messages.
E222314
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The system removes
other messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
118
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Active Park (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
The system detects a fault that requires service. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Active Park Fault
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from
engaging.
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot properly
function.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
Bad weather, ice, mud or water is causing poor radar visibility
and is blocking the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displays when automatic braking disables.Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the adaptive cruise system reinstates control
to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
AdvanceTrac™ and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
The system is off when the vehicle is in 4x4 low.AdvanceTrac OFF in 4x4
LOW
119
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
it on.
AdvanceTrac SPORT
MODE
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off.
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on.
Traction Control On
Alarm
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 78).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
AWD
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating.
AWD Temporarily
Disabled
The all-wheel drive system is locking up the torque transfer
clutch to help reduce clutch temperature.
AWD Temporarily
Locked
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare
tire.
AWD OFF
The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and
clear this message after driving a short distance with the road
tire re-installed or after the system cools.
AWD Restored
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer.
AWD Fault Service
Required
Displays when the transfer case fluid requires service.Change AWD Power
Transfer Unit Lube
Displays when you have the transfer case fluid changed and
reset to new.
AWD Power Transfer
Unit Lube Set to New
120
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Auto-Start-Stop
ActionMessage
You need to restart the engine and press
the brake pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine
You need to restart the engine and press
the brake pedal harder to start.
Auto StartStop Press Brake Harder to
Activate
You need to restart the engine and press
any pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start
Engine
Select neutral (N) for the system to restart
the engine.
Auto StartStop Select Neutral To Start
Engine
Select park (P) for the system to restart
the engine.
Auto StartStop Shift to P, then Restart
Engine
The system is not functioning. You need to
restart the engine.
Auto StartStop Manual Restart Required
Conditions are not met for the auto-start-
stop system to properly function.
Auto StartStop Not Available
121
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System (12 volt)
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Charging System Service
Soon
The charging system needs servicing. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Charging System Service
Now
The battery management system determines that the 12V
battery is at a low state of charge. Start the engine to charge
the battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery
charger. This message clears once you restart your vehicle
and the battery state of charge recovers.
Battery State of Charge
Low
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge recovers.
Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows for a faster
battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
Battery and Charging System (High Voltage) (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Your vehicle needs confirmation that you unplugged it before
allowing a start. You must make sure your vehicle is unplugged
and you respond to the message prompt before starting your
vehicle.
Vehicle Plugged In ? Yes
No
Your vehicle detects it is still plugged in after you attempt to
start it.
Unplug Prior to Starting
Vehicle
Your vehicle is ready to drive.Ready to Drive
Your vehicle is ready to drive. You have XXX% plug-in energy
available.
Ready to Drive {percent
charged:##0}%
Charged
You selected EV Now mode with the EV button.EV Now All Electric
Driving
122
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
You selected EV Later mode with the EV button.EV Later XX% Electric
Energy Saved for Later
You selected EV Charge mode with the EV button.EV Charge Battery
Charged by Engine
You selected Auto EV mode with the EV button.Auto EV Normal Opera-
tion
Your vehicle enables the engine due to the climate control
defrost setting. This is normal operation.
Engine Enabled Due to
Defrost Setting
For full defrost heat, press the EV button to select either EV
Later or EV Auto. The engine may run to provide more cabin
heat.
Press EV Button for Full
Defrost
Your vehicle enables the engine for system performance. This
is normal operation.
Engine Enabled for
System Performance
You can press OK to enable the engine temporarily for
increased performance when in EV Now mode.
Press OK to Enable
Engine
Displays when in neutral gear with the vehicle on. Shift out of
neutral to maintain full vehicle function.
In Neutral Depletes HV
Battery, Shift Out of
Neutral for Full Vehicle
Function
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A system error has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Blind Spot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
tion System (page 254).
Blind Spot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle and automatically applied the
brakes.
Cross Traffic Alert
Applying Brakes
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
256).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
123
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
A system error has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Cross
Traffic Alert (page 256).
Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 254).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv-
ated Trailer Attached
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The driver door is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar
The passenger door is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar
The rear left door is not completely closed.Rear Left Door Ajar
The rear right door is not completely closed.Rear Right Door Ajar
The liftgate is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar
The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
There is a system malfunction with the child locks. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Child Lock Malfunction
Service Required
Indicates that you have the rear seat interior door release
switches and power windows switched off, preventing rear
seat occupants from opening the doors or windows.
Child Lock ON
Indicates that you have the rear seat interior door release
switches and power windows switched on.
Child Lock OFF
The factory keypad code appears in the information display
after the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 76).
Factory Keypad Code {X
X X X X}
124
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.Fuel Door Opening
The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin
to refuel.
Fuel Door Open
A reminder to close the fuel door. Failure to follow this
instruction can cause the check engine light to illuminate.
Close Fuel Door to Avoid
Check Engine Light
There is an error in attempting to refill your vehicle.Refuel Error See Manual
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.
See Hill Start Assist (page 217).
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake when starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect the key. See Keyless Starting
(page 165).
No Key Detected
Appears when you need to press the Start Stop button to
shut off the engine when the system does not detect an
Intelligent Access key inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
125
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Full Accessory Power
Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is
programmed to the system.
Key Program Successful
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys
have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key has failed to be programmed.
Key Program Failure
Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys
Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
soon as possible.
Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Displays when the vehicle is switched off.Vehicle Switched Off
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the
steering wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
126
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%.Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be
inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 324).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over
Temperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact
Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
See Manual
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine
temperature.
Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
The brake system has reduced stopping power.Brake Applied Power
Reduced
127
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Check Rear Park Aid
The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water
in front of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
See Rear Parking Aid (page 224).
Rear Park Aid Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
128
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water
in front of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
See Front Parking Aid (page 226).
Front Park Aid Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water
in front of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
See Principle of Operation (page 224).
Park Aid Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive
your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake
and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed
exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued
driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake system has been put into a special
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
129
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Contact your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition
that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system.
Wait 2 minutes before attempting to apply again.
Park Brake System
Overheated
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The steering lock system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc-
tion Service Now
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available
Remote Start (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear
shift button to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
130
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available
when driving.
Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.Memory {0} Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
To START Press Brake
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 364).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 364).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. For more information on how the system operates
under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 364). If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
131
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Trailer (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 275).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 275).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 275).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual
Transmission
ActionMessage
Displays when you switch the engine off and the transmission
is not in park (P). Shift into park (P).
Shift to Park
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you
drive.
Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.Press Brake Pedal
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Over
Temperature Stop
Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
132
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized
dealer.
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical
after reconnecting or recharging the battery until you cycle
the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 325).
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs
to be depressed before exiting the vehicle. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the
Vehicle
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Service Required
Displays when there is a system fault when the vehicle is
shifting to park. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
Displays when there is a system fault when the vehicle is
shifting to reverse. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive
Unavailable Select S for
Drive Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Sport
Unavailable Service
Required
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to
enable the transmission to shift from park.
Depress Brake to Shift
from Park
Reminder to switch off the ignition when in neutral tow.Neutral Tow Engaged
Turn Ignition Off for
Towing
Displays when neutral hold is active and you want to exit
neutral tow.
Neutral Tow Engaged
Depress Brake and
Select Park to Exit
Neutral Tow
133
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Reminder to remove park brake when in neutral tow.Neutral Tow Remove
Park Brake for Towing
Displays when the neutral tow is off.Neutral Tow Disengaged
Displays when neutral tow is on.Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral
HEAD UP DISPLAY
E261230
The system displays information on a
display screen in your field of vision,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road.
You can select which information the
system displays.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Do not place anything on the head
up display, for example sunglasses or a cell
phone. This can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Cleaning the Head Up Display
Use a damp, lint-free cloth to clean the
head up display.
Note: Do not touch the display screen or
mirror.
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
Switching the Head Up Display On
or Off
E265900
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Note: The head up display menu appears
in the information display.
Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to select the following:
ActionMenu Item
Press the OK button.Head-Up Display (HUD)
Press the OK button.
Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start the engine.
134
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Adjusting the Head Up Display
Settings
Start the engine and switch the system on.
Note: Press the button on the steering
wheel if you do not see the head up display
menu in the information display.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. The system limits their
use to when your vehicle is not moving.
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to adjust the head up
display settings.
ActionMenu Item
Press the OK button.Adjustment
1. Press the OK button.
2. Use the up and down toggle buttons to adjust the
vertical position of the blue frame.
• Make sure that you can see all of the blue frame.
• Do not physically move the screen. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Position
1. Press the OK button.
2. Use the up and down toggle buttons to adjust the
brightness of the display screen.
• The system adjusts the brightness based on how
dark it is. If you set the brightness to a high level,
the system reduces the brightness at night.
Brightness
1. Press the OK button.
2. Use the up and down toggle buttons to adjust the
vertical size of the display screen.
• A small vertical size could be more suitable if you
sit in a high position.
Vertical Size
Selecting Which Information the
System Displays
Start the engine and switch the system on.
Note: Press the button on the steering
wheel if you do not see the head up display
menu in the information display.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. The system limits their
use to when your vehicle is not moving.
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to select which
information the system displays.
135
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMenu Item
Press the OK button.Content
Press the OK button.
Distance Indication
Eco Advice
Incoming Calls
Lane Keeping System
Navigation
Speed Assistance
Speed Sign Recognition
Head Up Display Indicator
E265900
Note: The head up display indicator could
illuminate to supplement an information
message.
Head Up Display Information Messages
ActionMessage
The system is malfunctioning or something is obstructing the display.
Make sure that the head up display is free from obstruction. If the
message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Head Up
Display System
Fault See
Manual
Press the button on the steering wheel. The head up display menu
appears in the information display.
Make sure the blue frame is fully visible. Do not manually move the
screen. This can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Head Up
Display To Posi-
tion Use the
Information
Display
Note: Information messages only appear in the information display.
136
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E290056
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Airflow
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the windshield
air vents and de-mister.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the instrument
panel air vents.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the footwell air
vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of
air circulated in the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E244106
Turn the control to set the temperature.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Press and release the button to
switch the air conditioning on or
off.
137
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Use air conditioning with recirculated air
to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, for example,
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise to the lowest
setting for maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set
to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Turn the temperature control
clockwise to the highest setting
for maximum defrosting.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set
to HI, air flows through the windshield air
vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use this setting
to defog and clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select maximum
defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
DUAL AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(DATC)
E290005
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Airflow
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the windshield
air vents and de-mister.
138
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the instrument
panel air vents.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the footwell air
vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Press and release + or - to adjust
the volume of air circulated in
the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E244115
Turn the control on the left-hand side of
the climate control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
the climate control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Repeatedly press the button to
adjust auto mode.
The system adjusts the blower motor
speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
to reach and maintain the temperature you
have set.
Adjust the blower motor control to turn
auto mode off.
139
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Auto Mode Indicator Status
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator
Status
One indicator illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is reduced.
• Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from
the blower motor.
• This setting increases the time taken to cool the
interior.
Two indicators illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is moderate.
Three indicators illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is increased.
• This setting increases the amount of noise from the
blower motor.
• Use this setting to reduce the time taken to cool the
interior.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Press and release the button to
switch the air conditioning on or
off.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air
to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, for example,
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Note: The button may be on the
temperature control.
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off
E265280
Press and release the button to
switch on temperature control
for the right-hand side of the
vehicle.
Note: The button may be on the
temperature control.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
The system sets the left-hand and
right-hand settings to LO, recirculated air
flows through the instrument panel air
vents, air conditioning turns on and the
blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
140
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on maximum defrost.
The system sets the left-hand and
right-hand settings to HI, air flows through
the windshield air vents, and the blower
motor adjusts to the highest speed. You
can also use this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The
heated rear window also turns on when
you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(EATC)
E289733
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Airflow
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the windshield
air vents and de-mister.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the instrument
panel air vents.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the footwell air
vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
141
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of
air circulated in the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E244115
Turn the control to set the temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Repeatedly press the button to
adjust auto mode.
The system adjusts the blower motor
speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
to reach and maintain the temperature you
have set.
Adjust the blower motor control to turn
auto mode off.
Note: The system starts at the previous
setting when you switch on AUTO mode.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone
mode by pressing and holding the button
for more than two seconds.
142
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Auto Mode Indicator Status
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator
Status
One indicator illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is reduced.
• Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from
the blower motor.
• This setting increases the time taken to cool the
interior.
Two indicators illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is moderate.
Three indicators illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is increased.
• This setting increases the amount of noise from the
blower motor.
• Use this setting to reduce the time taken to cool the
interior.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Press and release the button to
switch the air conditioning on or
off.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air
to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, for example,
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Note: The button may be on the
temperature control.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum defrosting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
143
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE -
VEHICLES WITH: AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. Automatic mode is best
recommended to maintain set temperature.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool
the interior to the temperature you select
as quickly as possible.
Note: For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
air flow to the windshield and side window
air vents. In addition, the blower motor may
run at a slower speed until the engine warms
up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
144
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press and release MAX A/C.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE -
VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest speed setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Select MAX A/C.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
period of time.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
3. Direct air to the instrument panel air
vents.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended
Periods During Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place your vehicle in park (P) or
neutral.
3. Select MAX A/C.
145
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
lowest speed setting.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Direct air to the instrument panel and
windshield air vents.
2. Press and release A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer.
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest setting.
5. Direct air toward the side windows.
6. Close the instrument panel air vents.
HEATED WINDSHIELD (IF
EQUIPPED)
Windshield Wiper De-Icer
E184884
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the windshield wiper
de-icer turns on.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Make sure the engine is on before
operating the heated windows.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window. The vehicle warranty may not
cover damage to the heated rear window
grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
(IF EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused to the mirror housing or glass.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 485).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
146
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system adjusts the
interior temperature during remote start.
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the touchscreen.
See Settings (page 467).
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
Switch the ignition on to make
adjustments.
Based on your remote start settings, the
following vehicle-dependent features may
or may not remain on after remote starting
your vehicle:
• Climate controlled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
• Windshield wiper de-icer.
Note: For dual zone climate controlled
seats, the passenger seat setting defaults
to match the driver seat during remote start.
Automatic Settings
If Auto is on, the system sets the interior
temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or
cools the vehicle interior as required to
achieve comfort.
Note: In cold weather, the heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
Last Settings
If Last Settings is on, the system uses the
settings last selected before you turned
off the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Features
In Auto mode, certain heated features may
switch on during cold weather, and cooled
features during hot weather.
147
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the
seatback too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in serious injury in the event of
a collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or crash.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30° from the
upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
148
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
WARNING: Adjust the head
restraints for all passengers before you
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Head Restraints
E291139
The front seat head restraints consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint
E187325
The rear seat center head restraint consists
of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraints
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
149
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting the Front Seat Head
Restraint (If Equipped)
The front head restraint tilts for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraint
E293091
The rear seat outermost head restraint
consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Fold button.D
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold both C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset.
150
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward.
E163870
Adjusting the Seat Height (If Equipped)
E293554
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
E293558
151
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E298944
Adjusting the Seat Cushion (If
Equipped)
E298771
Adjusting the Seat Height
E298772
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
E298773
152
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E298774
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants
are clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This function recalls the position of the
following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired memory
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three memory position
presets. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a Pre-Set Position
Press and release the memory button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when you switch the ignition off, or
when the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N) (and your vehicle is not moving)
if you switch the ignition on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access keyfob if it is linked
to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
You can save preset memory positions for
up to three remote controls or intelligent
access (IA) keys.
153
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it moves the driver seat position
rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch
the ignition off.
The driver seat returns to its previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display.
See Information Displays (page 111).
REAR SEATS
Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward.
E298125
154
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
Folding the Seat Backrest
E155554
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to
fold the seat backrest forward. You may
need to fold the outermost head restraints
and lower the center head restraint first.
Unfolding the Seat Backrest
Pull the seat backrest up to unfold it.
Adjusting the Seat Backrest (If
Equipped)
With the seat occupied, pull the lever up
to recline the seat backrest.
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything
on the seat that blocks the heat, for
example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
155
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
E146941
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
156
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Seats
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This allows for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
157
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1– 3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
158
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
159
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
160
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar
lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
Note: If the power supply does not work
after you switch the ignition off, switch the
ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse. Run the vehicle for full capacity
use of the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the front of the center console.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and
could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
E248640
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on or the vehicle is in
accessory mode.
161
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or the vehicle is not in accessory
mode.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGING (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we
recommend that you consult with your
physician.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Note: Devices without built-in Qi wireless
charging receivers require an additional Qi
receiver or sleeve.
Note: For compatible devices with built-in
Qi wireless charging capability, the charging
performance may be affected if your device
is in a case. It may be necessary to remove
the case to wirelessly charge your device.
The system supports one Qi wireless
charging compatible device on the
charging area.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip,
for example passports, parking tickets or
credit cards, near the charging area when
charging a device. Damage may occur to
the magnetic strip.
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy
wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
heat up and degrade the charging
performance.
Note: The device controls the rate of
charge, or charging power. During charging,
the device and the charger may heat up, this
is normal. If the battery gets hotter than
usual, the charger may stop charging.
E297549
The charging area is on the
center console or lower
instrument panel.
162
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
You can charge a device if the vehicle is
on, when in accessory mode, or anytime
SYNC is on.
To begin charging, place the device on the
center of the charging surface with the
charging side down. The charging stops
after your device reaches a full charge.
Note: If the system detects a foreign object
or if the device is misaligned on the charging
area, a message appears in the display.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
affect device compatibility, including the
use of unofficial software or firmware. You
should verify charging functionality with your
specific devices when in your vehicle.
DescriptionBehaviorMessage
This message appears when
wireless charging begins.
Message on screen display
or pop-up window.
Wireless Charger Active
The system stops charging
your device if the system
detects the phone is
misaligned, or a foreign
metal object is on the char-
ging surface.
Pop-up window.
Charging Terminated
Phone misaligned or object
between phone and charger
detected. Correct the condi-
tion to resume charging.
FCC ID: L2C0066T
Tests on this equipment show that it
complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
• This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. There is no
guarantee that the interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, please consult the dealer.
• This product is not end-user
serviceable.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
163
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E138656
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder.
164
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.
Always open the garage door before you
start the engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E304650
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
165
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
remote start, you can start your vehicle with
the remote, and then drive away by pressing
the brake pedal and pushing a button on
the transmission. This allows you to drive
away without pressing the engine start
button.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in P (automatic
transmission) or N (manual
transmission).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
166
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E306769
1. Remove the mat covering the backup
location.
2. Center the key in the backup location
as shown.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart the engine within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if a valid key is not
present.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without
the key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the push button
ignition switch, even if the system does not
detect a valid key. If you open and close a
door while the engine is running, the
system searches for a valid key. You
cannot restart the engine if the system
does not detect a valid key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift into park (P).
4. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
5. Release the accelerator pedal.
6. Turn the key to position III and wait
until the engine stops.
7. Start the engine.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
167
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic engine shutdown feature.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns
on at the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the
30-second countdown has expired by
doing any of the following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on (for the current ignition cycle
only). Use the information display to
do so. See Information Displays
(page 111).
• During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the push button ignition switch
once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
1. Put the transmission in position N and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to
a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch for one second, or press it three
times within two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
168
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Open the windows at least 1 in
(2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
STARTING A HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE SYSTEM
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in P.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The green ready indicator illuminates
letting you know that your vehicle is ready
for driving. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a silent key start, the engine may not
start when your vehicle starts. See Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 174).
When the engine starts for the first time
on your drive, the idle speed increases, this
helps to warm up the engine. If the engine
idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
E306769
1. Remove the mat covering the backup
location.
2. Center the passive key in the backup
location.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching your
vehicle off, press the brake pedal and press
the push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
169
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Shutdown
This feature automatically shuts down
your vehicle if it has been idling for an
extended period. The ignition also turns
off in order to save battery power. Before
your vehicle shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
your vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Automatic Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for
example pressing the brake or
accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on (for the current ignition cycle
only). Use the information display to
do so. See Information Displays
(page 111).
• During the countdown before
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Switching Off Your Vehicle When
It Is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the push button ignition switch
once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, warning
lamps and indicators.
Note: If your vehicle is left running for 30
minutes without any interaction, it
automatically shuts down.
Switching Off Your Vehicle When
It Is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
1. Put the transmission in position N and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to
a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, put
the transmission in position P.
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch for one second, or press it three
times within two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
170
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power
cable and may cause an electrical short
resulting in fire, injury and property
damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element, installed in the engine block and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• If the block heater cord is under the
hood, Do Not remove the wiring from
its original location. Do Not close the
hood on the extension wiring.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
171
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
172
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP (IF EQUIPPED)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
the engine while your vehicle is stopped.
The engine will restart automatically when
you release the brake pedal. In some
situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort
• To recharge the battery
Note: Power assist steering is turned off
when the engine is off.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: The system may
require the engine to automatically
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes
amber. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
111).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system is automatically enabled every
time you start your vehicle if the following
conditions are met:
• The Auto-Start-Stop button is not
pressed (button is not illuminated).
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) after the vehicle has
been initially started.
• Your vehicle is stopped.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The transmission is in drive (D).
• The driver's door is closed.
• There is adequate brake vacuum.
• The interior compartment has been
cooled or warmed to an acceptable
level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• The steering wheel is not being turned.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
• The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
• Vehicle is not being driven at a high
altitude.
• Ambient temperature is moderate.
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light,
it is illuminated when automatic engine
stop is not available due to one of the
above noted conditions not being met.
173
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• Your foot is removed from the brake
pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
• The driver seatbelt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• The maximum engine off time is
exceeded.
• When you press the Auto-Start-Stop
button while the engine is stopped
automatically.
• The heated windshield is turned on.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• The blower fan speed is increased or
the climate control temperature is
changed.
• An electrical accessory is turned on or
plugged in.
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. The system
will only be deactivated for the current
ignition cycle. Press the button again to
restore Auto-Start-Stop function.
If your vehicle is in an Auto-Start-Stop
state and you shift the transmission to
reverse while the brake is not depressed,
a message telling you to press the brake
will appear. You must press the brake
pedal within 60 seconds, or a shift to park
and a manual restart will be required.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. The
vehicle must be restarted manually. See
Information Displays (page 111).
HYBRID VEHICLE OPERATION
This hybrid vehicle combines electric and
gasoline propulsion to provide
breakthrough performance and improved
efficiency. Familiarizing yourself with these
unique characteristics provides an optimal
driving experience from your vehicle.
Starting
E293827
When you start your vehicle, a
green READY indicator light
appears in the instrument cluster
and a ready to drive message appears,
letting you know that your vehicle is ready
for driving.
The engine may not start because your
vehicle has a silent key start feature. This
fuel saving feature allows your vehicle to
be ready to drive without requiring the gas
engine to be running. The indicator remains
on when your vehicle is on, whether the
engine is running or not, to indicate your
vehicle is capable of movement using the
electric motor, gas engine or both.
Typically, the engine does not start unless
the vehicle is cold, a climate control
change is requested or you press the
accelerator pedal.
174
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
Driving
The gas engine automatically starts and
stops to provide power when needed and
to save fuel when not needed. When
coasting at low speeds, coming to a stop,
or standing, the gas engine normally shuts
down and your vehicle operates in
electric-only mode.
Conditions that may cause the engine to
start up or remain running include:
• Considerable vehicle acceleration.
• Climbing a hill.
• Charge level of high voltage battery is
low.
• High or low outside temperatures in
order to provide system heating or
cooling.
• Engine not warm enough to provide
passenger requested cabin
temperature.
• Towing a trailer.
• Selectable drive modes: Certain
selectable drive modes may cause the
engine to run. See What Is Drive Mode
Control (page 265).
• Live in Drive: Use of the paddle shifters
while in drive (D) may cause the engine
to run. See Transmission (page 202).
Stopping
The gas engine may shut off to conserve
fuel as you come to a stop. Restarting your
vehicle is not required. Simply step on the
accelerator when you are ready to drive.
Transmission Operation
The engine and electric motor together
propel the vehicle through the automatic
transmission. This is normal hybrid
operating and helps deliver fuel efficiency
and performance.
Battery
Your hybrid is equipped with a high voltage
battery. A cool battery maintains battery
life and provides the best possible
performance. The high voltage battery is
cooled by the vehicle's air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system
is on, you may notice a slight increase in
air temperature coming from the climate
control vents while the battery is cooling.
You may also notice cool air flowing from
the vents when the air conditioning or
blower is off.
You may also notice during extending
downhill driving that your engine continues
to run instead of shutting off. During this
engine braking, the engine stays on, but it
is not using any fuel. You may also hear a
slight whine or whistle when operating your
vehicle. This is the normal operation of the
electric motor in the hybrid system.
Braking
Your hybrid is equipped with standard
hydraulic braking and regenerative braking.
Regenerative braking is performed by your
transmission and it captures brake energy
and stores it in the high voltage battery.
Driving to Optimize Fuel Economy
Note: Having your engine running is not
always an indication of inefficiency. In some
cases, it is actually more efficient than
driving in electric mode.
Your fuel economy should improve
throughout your hybrid's break-in period.
As with any vehicle, your driving habits and
accessory usage can significantly impact
your fuel economy. For best results, keep
these tips in mind:
175
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
• Keep the tires properly inflated and
only use the recommended size.
• Aggressive driving increases the
amount of energy required to move
your vehicle. In general, you can
achieve better fuel economy with mild
to moderate acceleration and
deceleration. Moderate braking is
particularly important since it allows
you to maximize the energy captured
by the regenerative braking system.
Additional Tips:
• Do not carry extra loads.
• Be mindful of adding external
accessories that may increase
aerodynamic drag.
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Perform all scheduled maintenance.
• There is no need to wait for your engine
to warm up. The vehicle is ready to
drive immediately after starting.
PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE
OPERATION
Plug in your vehicle regularly for optimal
use of the high voltage battery's
electric-only range capability. Charging
your vehicle adds electrical energy. This
energy propels the vehicle.
You can see your estimated electric-only
driving range in blue next to the gasoline
range on the information display.
The system maximizes the use of
electric-only operation in Normal drive
mode. System conditions could require
engine operation, however, the system
uses the available electric range whenever
possible.
When your electric-only range reaches
zero, the powertrain system switches to
hybrid operation. This means that you have
depleted the energy you gained from
plugging in and charging your vehicle. Both
the gasoline engine and electric motor
power your vehicle and maximize fuel
economy during hybrid operation. You
receive some electric-only driving with
hybrid operation as the powertrain system
maintains the high voltage battery charge
within functional limits.
Electric Vehicle (EV) Modes
E288345
Your vehicle contains selectable electric
vehicle (EV) modes. Press the button on
the center console to change the mode.
EV Now and EV Later modes are only
available when you have electric-only
driving range available.
Note: EV mode availability also depends
on the state of the selectable drive mode
system.
Auto EV
E287836
This mode provides an
automatic use of high voltage
battery power during the drive,
staying in electric mode when possible and
running the engine when needed.
176
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
EV Now
E287826
This mode provides an electric
only driving experience. Do not
use EV Now when towing a
trailer. The electric drive system is not
designed for towing. An EV Now
information on demand screen appears.
This screen allows you to enable your
engine while in EV Now mode.
Your vehicle could accelerate slower and
the top speed could be lower than when
in Auto EV mode.
You can enable your engine at any time by
using one of the following methods:
• Press the OK button on the steering
wheel while viewing the EV Now
information on demand screen. Your
vehicle enables the engine as needed
and returns to EV Now mode when no
longer needed.
• Fully press the accelerator pedal. A
pop-up message appears. Press the
OK button on the steering wheel to
enable the engine. When the engine is
no longer needed, your vehicle returns
to EV Now. The message disappears if
you release the accelerator pedal.
• Press the EV button. This exits EV Now
mode and permits engine operation.
To return to EV Now mode, select it
again using the EV button.
Your vehicle could enter Engine Enabled
mode if system conditions require it. A
message displays if this occurs. This is a
normal function of the system and your
vehicle returns to EV Now mode when
possible.
When you enable EV Now mode, a blue EV
Now icon appears in the information
display. If your vehicle is in Engine Enabled
mode, the EV Now icon is amber. EV Now
exits when your available electric range
reaches zero.
EV Later
E287824
In EV Later, your vehicle runs on
the engine as needed and saves
most of the available electric
range for later use in Auto EV or EV Now
mode.
For example, your initial drive is at high
speeds on open roads, but later your drive
is at low speeds in an urban area where
electric only driving is most efficient. In this
case, you can select EV Later for the higher
speed portion of your trip and then select
Auto EV or EV Now for the urban portion.
When you enable EV Later, a white EV
Later icon appears in the information
display. EV Later resets to Auto EV when
you switch off your vehicle. You may select
EV Later again using the EV button during
your next drive.
When you select EV Later with the vehicle
fully charged or near fully charged, the
battery uses some electric-only driving
range to discharge the battery, and allows
for full operation of the regenerative
braking system.
EV Charge
E287822
This mode uses your vehicle's
engine to charge the high voltage
battery versus plugging the
vehicle into a utility grid.
The electric range gained through EV
Charge allows you to switch to Auto EV or
EV Now for full electric operation later in
your drive. The battery cannot completely
charge to 100% when in EV Charge mode.
This is to allow for full operation of the
regenerative braking system. When the
battery reaches its EV Charge limit, the
vehicle remains in EV Charge mode and
maintains that charge level, until you select
another EV Mode, or until you switch the
vehicle off.
177
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
When you enable EV Charge, a white EV
Charge icon appears in the information
display.
EV Charge resets to Auto EV when you
switch off your vehicle. You may select EV
Charge again using the EV button during
your next drive.
Low Engine Use
The low engine use mode maintains proper
engine lubrication at sufficient
temperature, and activates when you drive
your vehicle with limited engine operation.
When in low engine use mode, your vehicle
runs the engine as necessary. When low
engine use mode begins, a message
appears in the information display. If low
engine use mode does not complete
before you switch your vehicle off, it
continues the next time you start your
vehicle and the message reappears.
EV Now mode is not available during low
engine use mode.
Note: Cold temperatures affect the engine
warm up time and the low engine use mode
could operate more frequently.
Note: You do not require an oil change, but
it gives you the option of not running a low
engine use cycle. Resetting the oil life
monitoring system suspends the low engine
use mode.
HYBRID VEHICLE FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
AnswerQuestion
The high voltage battery is electrically isol-
ated from the rest of the vehicle when the
key is off. When you switch the key on, high
voltage contactors inside the battery are
closed to make the electricity available to
the motor and generator and enable the
vehicle to drive. The clicks are the sound of
these contactors as they close and open
during start up and shut down.
What are the series of clicks from the cargo
area when I first turn the key in the ignition?
The vehicle's computer will determine if an
engine start is required at key-on. Silent key
start will start the engine if it is necessary
for cabin heating, windshield defrost, or if
the outside temperature is low.
Why does the engine sometimes start at
key-on?
There are several reasons the engine stays
on for an extended amount of time when
you first start it. One common reason is to
make sure that the emissions components
are warm enough to minimize tailpipe
emissions. As the climate gets cooler, this
engine-on time is extended.
Why does it take a long time before the
engine shuts down?
178
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
AnswerQuestion
The engine is required to turn on above this
speed to protect the transmission hard-
ware.
Why does my engine never shut down
above 85 mph (137 km/h)
In order to make sure that the climate
control system can begin heating the cabin
or defrosting the windshield as soon as a
driver requests it, the engine coolant
temperature has to be kept sufficiently hot.
Keeping the engine on is required to main-
tain the correct coolant temperature.
Why does my engine stay on when it is
extremely cold outside?
Your vehicle's engine and transmission are
designed to deliver the power you need at
the most efficient engine speed. This may
be higher than expected during heavy
accelerations, and may fluctuate when
driving at a steady speed. These are charac-
teristics of the Atkinson engine cycle and
the transmission technology that help
maximize your hybrid's fuel economy.
Why does my engine rev up so high some-
times when I accelerate?
Change the engine oil every 12,000 mi
(20,000 km) or once per year under normal
operating conditions.
What is the engine oil change service
interval?
Yes. Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 (15%
ethanol, 85% gasoline) fuel, but you may
notice slightly reduced fuel economy
because ethanol contains less energy per
gallon than gasoline. Your hybrid vehicle is
not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol).
Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and how
will it affect my fuel economy?
The high voltage battery system is designed
to last the life of the vehicle and requires
no maintenance.
How long will my high voltage battery last?
Does it need maintenance?
The plug-in hybrid high voltage battery can
be charged by plugging the vehicle into an
AC outlet.
Can you charge the battery with a plug into
an AC outlet?
There are no provisions for charging the
conventional hybrid high voltage battery
from a power supply external to the vehicle.
Yes. Your hybrid vehicle can be flat towed
with all four wheels on the ground. See
Towing (page 275).
Can I tow the hybrid behind my motor home
with all four wheels on the ground?
179
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
180
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 275).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
compartment floor covering.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
181
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open
or push open the capless fuel system
with foreign objects. This could damage
the fuel system and its seal and cause
injury to you or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 181).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
182
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING - EXCLUDING:
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)/PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
E321654
Left-hand side.Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to fully open
it. After refueling, close the door
by pushing and compressing it
into the vehicle.
A
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to fully open
it. After refueling, close the door
by pushing and compressing it
into the vehicle.
B
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
183
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Stop refueling when
the fuel pump nozzle automatically
shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
A
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E321655
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
6. When the nozzle shuts off, wait at least
5 seconds, then slightly raise the fuel
pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
184
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
181). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
REFUELING - HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)/
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Stop refueling when
the fuel pump nozzle automatically
shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
185
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
1. When you stop your vehicle, shift into
park (P) and switch the ignition off.
E146221
2. Press the button on the left side
dashboard to open the fuel filler door.
The fuel filler door can take up to 15
seconds to open before you can insert
a fuel filler nozzle.
E139202
A
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
nozzle in position A can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.
186
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E321655
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
6. When the nozzle shuts off, wait at least
5 seconds, then slightly raise the fuel
pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: To close the fuel filler door, press the
center rear edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
You must complete the refueling process
within 20 minutes. If 20 minutes elapses,
you must press the button on the
dashboard again. Fuel pump nozzle
automatic shut off may occur if you do not
press the button on the dashboard.
System Warnings
If the fuel filler door fails to open, an
information message appears in the
information display.
Description and ActionMessage
A warning message appears
in the information display
when the fuel system fails
to depressurize or the fuel
filler door fails to open. You
may have to use the fuel
filler door manual override
lever.
Refuel
Error See
Manual
If the information message appears, do the
following:
1. Check the fuel filler door for anything
that may be obstructing its movement,
for example ice or snow.
2. Remove any obstruction from the fuel
filler door.
3. Press the button on the dashboard to
open the fuel filler door.
4. If the fuel filler door fails to open and
the information message remains in
the information display, use the fuel
filler door manual override lever.
Fuel Filler Door Manual Override
Lever
Note: The transmission must be in park (P)
or neutral (N).
When using the manual override lever do
the following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
187
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E297793
Note: The manual override lever is in the
driver side rear wheel well area.
2. Pull the manual override lever.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Complete the refueling process within
20 minutes.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 375).
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: When refueling your vehicle after the
fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity due to the empty
reserve still present in the fuel tank.
Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See Information Displays
(page 111).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
1. Completely fill the fuel tank and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
188
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving, for example city
or highway. This provides an accurate
estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions. Keeping
records during summer and winter shows
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Avoid adding accessories that increase
aerodynamic drag to your vehicle such
as bug deflectors, car top carriers and
ski or bike racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
189
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the
vehicle from the engine and exhaust
system heat and noise. On vehicles with
no original equipment floor covering
insulation, do not carry passengers in a
manner that permits prolonged skin
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
190
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short
period of engine operation and stays hot
after the engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 288).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
191
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 183).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
192
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
193
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: This battery pack
should only be serviced by an authorized
electric vehicle technician. Improper
handling can result in personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Apply the parking
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before
you open the hood or have any service
or repair work completed. If you do not
switch the ignition off, the engine could
restart at any time. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not touch the
electronic ignition system parts after you
have switched the ignition on or when
the engine is running. The system
operates at high voltage. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Keep your hands and
clothing clear of the engine cooling fan.
Note: The high-voltage battery does not
require regular service maintenance.
Your vehicle consists of various
high-voltage components and wiring. All
of the high-voltage power flows through
specific wiring assemblies labeled as such
or covered with a solid orange convolute,
or orange striped tape, or both. Do not
come in contact with these components.
The high-voltage battery pack contains a
lithium-ion battery. The pack is underneath
the vehicle. The high-voltage battery
system uses an advanced liquid heating
and cooling system to regulate the
high-voltage battery temperature and help
maximize high-voltage battery life.
CHARGING THE HIGH
VOLTAGE BATTERY
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING: In Canada, do not use
the 120 volt convenience cord in
commercial garages.
WARNING: This equipment has
arcing or sparking parts. Do not expose
to flammable vapors. Position this
equipment at least 18 in (450 mm)
above the floor.
RISK OF FIRE or ELECTRIC SHOCK
WARNING: The AC wall plug must
fit firmly into the AC outlet. If the
connection feels loose, worn or the AC
outlet is damaged, please have a
qualified electrician replace the AC
outlet. Using a convenience cord with a
worn outlet may cause burns, property
damage and increase the risk of electric
shock.
WARNING: Do not use the 120 V
convenience cord with an extension cord,
two-prong adapter, surge protector,
timer or other adapter.
WARNING: Do not allow charging
equipment to be immersed in water or
liquids. Failure to follow this warning
could result in fire, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to open
the charging equipment. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury, death or property damage.
194
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
WARNING: Do not use the charging
equipment if it is faulty or has been
damaged. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury,
death or property damage.
WARNING: You risk death or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Install charging
equipment in compliance with local
regulations. Failure to follow this warning
could result in fire, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not use an
ungrounded wall outlet. If you suspect
that the wall outlet is not properly
grounded, have a qualified electrician
inspect the wall outlet. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not modify the
convenience cord plug. If the
convenience cord plug does not properly
fit into the wall outlet, have a qualified
electrician install the correct wall outlet.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Note: This product must be grounded. If it
should malfunction or break down,
grounding provides a path of least
resistance for electric current to reduce the
risk of electric shock. This product is
equipped with a cord having an equipment
grounding conductor and a grounding plug.
The plug must be plugged into an
appropriate outlet that is properly installed
and grounded in accordance with all local
codes and ordinances.
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
• Read all the instructions before using
this product.
• This device should be supervised when
in use around children.
• Do not put fingers into the electric
vehicle connector.
• Do not use this product if the flexible
power cord or electric vehicle cable is
frayed, has broken insulation, or any
other signs of damage.
• Do not use this product if the enclosure
or the electric vehicle connector is
broken, cracked, open, or shows any
other indication of damage.
Charging Equipment
Your vehicle has a convenience cord in the
luggage compartment.
Note: The convenience cord will need to
be plugged into a dedicated outlet.
Note: The AC wall plug must fit firmly into
the AC outlet. If the connection feels loose,
worn or the AC outlet is damaged, please
have a qualified electrician replace the AC
outlet. Using a convenience cord with a
worn outlet may cause burns, property
damage and increase the risk of electric
shock.
Note: Do not use the 120 volt convenience
cord with an extension cord, two-prong
adapter, surge protector, timer or other
adapter.
Note: If charging for your plug-in vehicle
fails, please call the Customer Relationship
Center, or click on Call for support or Live
Chat at our website.
195
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
Convenience Cord
E299688
B
A
C
Power.A.
Fault.B.
Check Outlet.C.
CAUTION:TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
FIRE- The AC outlet must be a three-prong
AC outlet that is properly grounded, 15-20
amps or greater, and in good condition.
Use a dedicated line. You cannot have
other appliances connected to the same
circuit. If you do not use a dedicated
circuit, the circuit breaker could trip or
open. If you do not have a dedicated circuit,
contact a licensed professional electrician
for proper installation.
Note: Make sure the electrical source meets
the requirements for the high-voltage
batteries to charge.
Make sure that the convenience cord is
completely unwrapped before charging.
Always plug the cord into the AC outlet
before connecting the charged coupler into
the charge port on your vehicle.
Note: When the convenience cord is
plugged into an outlet, use the following
table to determine your vehicle charge
status. If the power indicator light is off after
plugging in the convenience cord, use a
different outlet.
Note: Store the convenience cord in a clean
dry place between the temperature of
-39.9–193.9°F (-40–90°C)
196
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
What to DoWhat it MeansConvenience Cord LED
Indicators
Check
Outlet
(Amber)
Fault
(Red)
Power
(Green)
Use a different
wall outlet.
If the LED indicators are off after plug-
ging in the convenience cord and the
plug is experiencing a no power condi-
tion from the wall outlet, use a different
outlet.
OffOffOff
No action required.The convenience cord is plugged into
the wall outlet and ready to charge your
vehicle. Reference the charge port
section below for information on vehicle
charging.
OffOffOn
Check the outlet.
If the problem
persists, use
different outlet.
The convenience cord AC plug is
experiencing an overheat condition.
Convenience cord is in retry mode to
return to normal condition. If the fault
persists, you have a bad wall outlet.
OnFlashingOn
Check the outlet.
If the problem
persists, use
different outlet.
The convenience cord is charging at a
reduced current rate due to a wall
outlet over temperature condition.
FlashingOffOn
Have the outlet
serviced.
The convenience cord AC plug has
overheated. Cordset retry mode
exhausted. Your vehicle is not charging.
You have a bad wall outlet.
FlashingOnOn
Unplug and re-
plug to vehicle
charge port.
The convenience cord is experiencing a
ground fault at the charge port.
Convenience cord is in retry mode to
return to normal condition. Your vehicle
is not charging.
OffFlashingOn
197
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
What to DoWhat it MeansConvenience Cord LED
Indicators
Check
Outlet
(Amber)
Fault
(Red)
Power
(Green)
Request vehicle
service.
The convenience cord is experiencing a
ground fault at the charge port. Cordset
retry mode exhausted. Your vehicle is
not charging. Call for service.
OffOnOn
Connect to a prop-
erly grounded AC
outlet.
Missing ground at AC outlet. Your
vehicle is not charging. The convenience
cord is in retry mode.
Two
flash
interval
On/Two
flash
interval
On
Request cordset
service. Replace
cordset.
Convenience cord internal fault. Call for
service.
OffOn/
Flashing
On
Note: If charging for your plug-in vehicle
fails, please call the Customer Relationship
Center, or click on Call for support or Live
chat at your vehicle's manufacture website.
Charge Port
The charge port is between the front
left-hand side door and front left-hand
wheel well. To open, press the center right
edge of the charge port door and then
release.
E295258
Note: Do not force the charge port door
open or closed. Forcing the door open or
closed will damage the charge port.
The charge status indicator around the
charge port indicates the charge status of
the high voltage battery in your vehicle.
Divided into five zones, the charge status
indicator displays the state of charge in 20
percent increments.
The color white is used as a courtesy light
to help with plugging in and to
acknowledge actions such as plugging in,
unplugging or pressing the charge times
button.
The color blue is used when the vehicle is
plugged in and either charging or waiting
to charge.
The color orange is used to indicate charge
faults.
Charge Times Button
Use the charge times button to either turn
off or turn on your charge times settings
for this location. Select charge settings on
the home page of your touchscreen or
under the vehicle settings menu to access
charge preferences. See SYNC™ 3 (page
434).
198
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
E301111
Charging
E306676
Note: Your vehicle must be in park (P) to
charge and for the charge status indicator
to illuminate.
Note: Pump, fan noise could be present
when charging the high voltage battery. The
pump, fan noise is normal to hear as it
circulates liquid and keeps your high voltage
battery cool while charging.
Note: You cannot disconnect the charging
coupler until charging has been stopped or
completed.
To charge the high-voltage battery:
1. Put the vehicle in park (P).
2. Press the center right edge of the
charge port door and then release to
open the door.
3. Plug the charging coupler into the
charge port receptacle on your vehicle.
Make sure the button clicks confirming
that you have completely engaged the
coupler.
E295257
4. Verify that the cord acknowledgment
feature activates. This indicates the
beginning of a normal charge cycle.
The charge status indicator lights up
each zone alternately from bottom to
top and from bottom to top again.
5. If using a 240 volt charging station,
follow the instructions on the charge
station to begin the charging process.
The charge status indicator will display
how far along the charge is:
• When the bottom zone is pulsing, the
charge is between 0-20 percent.
• When the bottom zone illuminates, and
the next is pulsing, the charge is
between 20-40 percent.
• When two zones illuminate the next is
pulsing, the charge is between 40-60
percent.
• When three zones illuminate, and the
next is pulsing, the charge is between
60-80 percent.
• When four zones illuminate, and the
top zone is pulsing, the charge is
between 80-100 percent.
• When all zones illuminate, the charge
is 100 percent.
199
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
E301197
80%-100% State of Charge.A.
60%-80% State of Charge.B.
40%-60% State of Charge.C.
20%-40% State of Charge.D.
0%-20% State of Charge.E.
Note: When charging stops, the charge
status indicator shows all the completed
zones solidly lit up in a blue color for 30
seconds before turning off. For example, if
charging stops at 70 percent, then the
bottom three zones light up solidly to
indicate a battery charge level of at least
60 percent but less than 80 percent.
Charging stops when complete or when
paused due to preferred charge settings or
charge station actions.
Note: If the charge status indicator does
not light up or pulse after plugging in, please
verify that the charge port light setting is
"On". If you do not wish to have the charge
status indicator light up at all while charging
then you can turn it "Off". See charge port
light under vehicle settings on your
touchscreen. See SYNC™ 3 (page 434).
E306677
Note: Charging faults are identified by the
color orange on the charge status indicator.
Faults can occur within the vehicle charging
system or outside the vehicle, such as with
the charge cord, charge station or electrical
supply.
Note: If the system detects a fault in the
vehicle charging system at any point in a
charge cycle, the entire charge status
indicator lights up solidly in an orange color
for 30 seconds and then turns off. If this
happens, unplug the charging coupler and
then plug it back into the charge port
receptacle. If the problem persists, contact
your dealer.
Note: If the system detects a fault outside
the vehicle, such as with the charge station
or charge cord, the entire charge status
indicator flashes continuously for 30
seconds and then turns off. If this happens
check the charge cord and the charge
station or electrical supply.
Locking the Charging Coupler
E295451
Note: You will need a padlock or a
combination lock with a shackle diameter
of 0.2 in (5 mm) or less and the straight
portion of the shackle of 1.0 in (25.4 mm)
of length or more.
200
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
1. Insert the lock through the hole in the
charging coupler button.
2. Lock the padlock or combination lock.
Waiting to Charge
E306678
Note: Select charge settings on the home
page of your touchscreen or under the
vehicle settings menu to access charge
preferences. See SYNC™ 3 (page 434).
Charging may not begin upon plugging in
if you have set up preferred charge times
for this vehicle location. Your vehicle could
delay charging to take advantage of
off-peak electricity rates. Your vehicle
optimizes the charge schedule to be
complete by your next departure time.
When waiting to charge (plugged in and
not currently charging), the charge status
indicator shows the present state of charge
of the high voltage battery by lighting up
all completed zones for 30 seconds before
turning off. For example, if the battery is at
70 percent charge then the bottom three
zones solidly light up to indicate a battery
charge level of at least 60 percent but less
than 80 percent. Consistently, when the
current state of charge is less than 20
percent none of the zones light up.
Note: When your vehicle is waiting to
charge, the charge status indicator turns off
30 seconds after displaying the present
state of charge. When your vehicle begins
charging, the charge status indicator turns
on and displays how far along the charge is
as described above.
Disconnecting the Charging Coupler
Note: Do not pull the wall plug from the
wall while your vehicle is charging. Doing so
could damage the outlet and the cord.
1. If you have installed a padlock or
combination lock then remove it.
2. Press the button on the charging
coupler.
3. While holding the button, remove the
charging coupler from the charge port
receptacle.
E295444
4. Press the center right edge of the
charge port door to close.
MOVING AND STORAGE
INSTRUCTIONS
Note: Do not hold the convenience cord by
the flexible power cable. Hold the complete
unit and carefully place back in the storage
bag.
Make sure that the convenience cord is
completely wrapped after charging.
Always store the convenience cord in the
storage bag supplied with the convenience
cord.
When complete, replace the convenience
cord in the luggage compartment.
Note: Store the convenience cord in a clean
dry place between the temperature of
-39.9–193.9°F (-40–90°C)
201
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
High Voltage Battery - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)/
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property
damage.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the remote control is inside
your vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of Your Automatic Transmission
E303655
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
Your vehicle has an electronic transmission
shifter. The transmission selector is on the
center console, below the climate control
system.
To place the vehicle in gear from park (P):
1. Fully press and hold the brake pedal
when shifting out of park (P).
2. Rotate the outer ring of the
transmission selector clockwise from
park (P), until the desired gear
illuminates on the transmission
selector.
3. Release the brake pedal and the
transmission remains in the selected
gear.
The instrument cluster also displays the
current gear.
Park (P)
With the transmission selector in park (P),
the vehicle locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning. Always
come to a complete stop before putting
the vehicle into and out of park (P). An
audible tone sounds once you select park
(P).
202
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
The electric parking brake may apply when
you shift to Park (P) without the brake
pedal fully depressed. The electric parking
brake applies when you shift to Park (P)
on large slopes, and releases with the drive
away release function.
Reverse (R)
With the transmission selector in reverse
(R), your vehicle moves backward. Always
come to a complete stop before shifting
into and out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission selector in neutral
(N), you can start your vehicle and it is free
to roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in
this position.
WARNING: In neutral (N) your
vehicle has the ability to roll freely. If you
intend to leave your vehicle, make sure
you apply the parking brake.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy.
Low (L)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Shift the transmission into low (L) at
any vehicle speed.
• The intent is not for use under
extended or normal driving conditions
and results in lower fuel economy.
Manual (M) (If Equipped)
In manual (M), you can upshift or
downshift using the paddle shifters.
With your vehicle in drive (D), press the
manual (M) button to activate manual
mode.
SelectShift
Use this feature to upshift or downshift
using the paddle shifters.
You can only use this feature in drive (D)
or manual (M).
E144821
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (-) to downshift.
In manual (M), press the manual (M)
button to switch the feature off and return
to drive (D).
Note: SelectShift in drive (D) provides
temporary manual control of the gear
selection.
Automatic Return to park
Note: This feature does not operate when
your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
Your vehicle has a feature that shifts your
vehicle into park (P) when any of the
following conditions occur:
• You turn the vehicle off.
• You open the driver door with your
seatbelt unlatched.
• You unlatch your seatbelt when the
driver door is open.
If you switch your vehicle off when moving,
the vehicle first shifts into neutral (N) until
it slows down enough to shift into park (P).
203
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
Note: If you have waited for more than two
minutes before switching the ignition on,
unfastening your seatbelt causes this
feature to activate, even with the driver door
closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If
your door ajar indicator does not illuminate
when you open the driver door or the
indicator illuminates with the driver door
closed, see your authorized dealer.
Stay in Neutral Mode
Note: Stay in neutral is a temporary vehicle
state with the ignition off. Once in this
mode, sufficient battery voltage must be
maintained or your vehicle will return to
park. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in vehicle damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Note: When entering an automatic car
wash, always shift to neutral (N). If you are
exiting the vehicle before the car wash, stay
in neutral mode is available.
Stay in neutral mode allows your vehicle
to stay in neutral when you exit your
vehicle. Your vehicle must be stationary to
enter this mode.
Note: Failure to follow this instruction could
result in vehicle damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
To enter stay in neutral mode
1. Switch your vehicle on but do not start
the engine. See Keyless Starting
(page 165).
2. Place your foot on the brake pedal and
rotate the transmission selector to
neutral (N).
Note: When in neutral (N), a message
appears in the display screen informing you
how to access stay in neutral mode.
3. Press the manual (M) or Low (L)
button in the middle of the
transmission selector to enter stay in
neutral mode.
A message appears in the display screen
confirming your vehicle is in stay in neutral
mode. The neutral (N) indicator light on
the transmission selector also flashes.
To exit stay in neutral mode, place your
foot on the brake pedal and rotate the
transmission selector to park (P).
Manual Park Release
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not drive your
vehicle until you verify that the
stoplamps are working.
Use the manual park release to move your
transmission from the park (P) position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or
emergency.
Activating the Manual Park Release
Cable
1. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 216).
204
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example,
no electrical power is available, you could
use an external power to apply the parking
brake.
E307867
2. Locate the manual park release cable
access cover on the lower instrument
panel dash to the bottom left hand
side of the steering column.
3. Using a tool or the key blade, carefully
open the access cover.
Note: Do not pull the tether until you are in
the driver seat.
4. Switch the ignition on, but do not start
your vehicle.
5. Once in the driver seat, fully press the
brake pedal and hold. Do not release.
Pull the orange tether towards the
driver seat until the tether gets locked
in the override position. Then leave the
tether.
6. If done correctly a message should
display on the instrument cluster
screen. See information messages later
in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle is now out of the park
(P) position and is free to roll.
7. With your foot still fully applied on the
brake pedal, disengage the parking
brake. See Electric Parking Brake
(page 216).
8. Your vehicle remains in neutral (N) for
emergency towing purposes.
9. Switch off the ignition.
10. Once safe to do so, and there is no
risk that your vehicle will roll,
disconnect the negative (black)
battery cable from the battery.
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal
Mode
1. Once it is safe to do so, reconnect the
negative (black) battery cable to the
battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 216).
Note: If vehicle battery is dead, for example,
no electrical power is available, you could
use an external power to apply the parking
brake.
3. Fully apply the brake pedal and hold.
Do not release. Pull the orange tether
outward towards the driver seat to
release it from the override position.
4. The cable will release and retract back
to its original rest position.
205
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
5. Stow the manual park release cable
tether back inside the instrument panel
dash hole, install the access cover by
pressing it back in position.
6. With your foot fully applied on the
brake pedal, start your vehicle. Confirm
that your vehicle is in the park (P)
position and that the instrument
cluster indicates park (P).
7. If the instrument cluster is not
displaying the park (P) position or a
message displays on the instrument
cluster screen, make sure you apply the
parking brake before exiting your
vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer
for service.
Information Messages
DescriptionMessage
The electric parking
brake is not fully
applied.
Park Brake Not
Applied
A reminder to shift
into park. In addi-
tion, this message
is typically after
reconnecting or
recharging the
battery until you
cycle the ignition to
the on mode.
Transmission Not in
Park
Displays when
there is a system
fault and the park
brake needs to be
depressed before
exiting the vehicle.
See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Apply Park Brake
Before Exiting the
Vehicle
DescriptionMessage
The system has
detected a fault
that requires
service. Have your
vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Transmission
Malfunction Service
Now
Displays when you
shift into neutral
(N).
Select M To
Confirm Stay In
Neutral Mode
Displays to confirm
that your vehicle
has entered Stay in
Neutral Mode.
Stay in Neutral
Mode Engaged
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission could occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires could occur, or the engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
rock it out by shifting between forward and
reverse gears, stopping between shifts in
a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)/PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
206
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property
damage.
Note: The ready to drive indicator may be
off and you may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the remote control is inside
your vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of your Automatic Transmission
E224178
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
Your vehicle has an electronic transmission
shifter. The transmission selector is on the
center console, below the climate control
system.
To place your vehicle in gear from park (P):
1. Fully press and hold the brake pedal
when shifting out of park (P).
2. Rotate the outer ring of the
transmission selector clockwise from
park (P), until the desired gear
illuminates on the transmission
selector.
3. Release the brake pedal. The
transmission remains in the selected
gear.
The instrument cluster displays the current
gear.
Park (P)
With the transmission selector in park (P),
your vehicle locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning. Always
come to a complete stop before putting
your vehicle into and out of park (P). An
audible chime sounds once you select park
(P).
When the ignition is turned off, your vehicle
automatically shifts into park (P). If the
ignition is turned off when the vehicle is
moving, it first shifts into neutral (N) until
a slow enough speed is reached. Your
vehicle then shifts into park (P)
automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature does not operate when
your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode or
neutral tow.
Your vehicle has a feature that
automatically shifts your vehicle into park
(P) when any of the following conditions
occur:
• You turn the vehicle off.
• You open the driver's door with your
seatbelt unlatched.
• Your seatbelt is unlatched when the
driver's door is open.
If you turn your vehicle off when moving,
your vehicle first shifts into neutral (N) until
it slows down enough to shift into park (P)
automatically.
207
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
Note: If you have waited an extended
period of time (2-15 minutes) before starting
your vehicle, unlatching your seatbelt causes
this feature to activate, even with the
driver's door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If
your door ajar indicator does not illuminate
when you open the driver’s door or the
indicator illuminates with the driver’s door
closed, see your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the transmission selector in reverse
(R), your vehicle moves backward. Always
come to a complete stop before shifting
into and out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission selector in neutral
(N), your vehicle can be started and is free
to roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in
this position.
Stay in Neutral Mode
Note: Always put your vehicle in stay in
neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Note: When entering an automatic car
wash, always shift to neutral (N). If you are
exiting the vehicle before the car wash, stay
in neutral mode is available.
Stay in neutral mode allows your vehicle
to stay in neutral when you exit your
vehicle. Your vehicle must be stationary to
enter this mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Switch on your vehicle. Make sure it is
in ready to drive mode. See Keyless
Starting (page 165).
2. Place your foot on the brake pedal and
rotate the transmission selector to
neutral (N).
Note: When in neutral (N), a message
appears in the display screen informing you
how to access stay in neutral mode.
3. Press either the low (L) or manual (M)
button in the middle of the
transmission selector to enter stay in
neutral mode.
A message appears in the display screen
confirming your vehicle is in stay in neutral
mode. The neutral (N) indicator light on
the transmission selector also flashes.
To exit stay in neutral mode, place your
foot on the brake pedal and rotate the
transmission selector to park (P).
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy.
Grade Assist
Press the grade assist button to
activate grade assist. The grade
assist lamp appears in the
instrument cluster. Press the button again
to switch it off.
Grade assist:
• Provides additional grade braking with
a combination of engine motoring and
high-voltage battery charging to help
maintain vehicle speed when
descending a grade.
• As your vehicle determines the amount
of engine motoring and high-voltage
battery charging, you may notice the
engine speed increasing and
decreasing to help maintain your
vehicle speed when descending a
grade.
208
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
Low (L)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• The transmission may be shifted into
low (L) at any vehicle speed.
• Is not intended for use under extended
or normal driving conditions and results
in lower fuel economy.
Information Messages
ActionDescription
The electric parking brake is not fully
applied.
Park Brake Not Applied
A reminder to shift into park. In addition,
this message is typical after reconnecting
or recharging the battery until you cycle the
ignition to the on mode.
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when there is a system fault and
the park brake needs to be depressed
before exiting the vehicle. See your author-
ized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Apply Park Brake Before
Exiting the Vehicle
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
209
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: When a system malfunction is
present, a warning message will be
displayed in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 118). This
means the system is not functioning
correctly and has defaulted to front-wheel
drive only. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
Note: A message will be displayed in the
information display when the system
overheats and switches to front-wheel drive.
This condition may occur if you operate your
vehicle in extreme high-load conditions or
with excessive wheel slip, (i.e. deep sand).
To resume all-wheel drive function as soon
as possible, stop your vehicle in a safe
location and switch the ignition off. After
the system cools and normal all-wheel drive
functionality resumes, a message displays
for approximately five seconds.
Note: If a warning message appears in the
information display when using the spare
tire, it should turn off after reinstalling the
repaired or replaced road tire and you switch
the ignition on.
Note: It is recommended that you reinstall
the repaired tire or replace the tire as soon
as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes
between the front and rear axles could
cause system damage or default the system
to front-wheel drive.
Your all-wheel drive vehicle is not intended
for off-road use. The all-wheel drive
feature gives your vehicle some limited
off-road capabilities in which driving
surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle in other than those
conditions could subject the vehicle to
excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered by your
warranty.
E142669
A graphic will be displayed in the
information display to advise you of the
power distribution between the front and
rear wheels. The more the area is filled the
more power is being distributed to that
wheel.
Driving in Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive
All-wheel drive has operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from two-wheel drive, both on
and off the freeway.
Note: It may be useful to switch traction
control off. This allows for more wheel spin
and engine torque in certain conditions or if
your vehicle becomes stuck.
When driving at slow speeds under
high-load conditions, use a low gear when
possible. Low gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling
capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the air
conditioning may cycle on and off to
prevent the engine from overheating.
Basic Operating Principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice, proceed with care.
210
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been
reduced, ease your vehicle back onto the
road. Do not turn the steering wheel
sharply while returning your vehicle to the
road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressure. Shift to a
lower gear and drive steadily through the
terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid excessive wheel slip.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This will cause
the system to overheat. A message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 118).
To resume operation, switch the ignition
off and allow the system to cool down for
a minimum of 15 minutes. After the system
has cooled down, a message appears
briefly in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 118).
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
211
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even all-wheel drive vehicles can lose
traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or
hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
212
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brake pedal.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire
chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
allow for longer stopping distances and
avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death.
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while
cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your
vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
All-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although an
all-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. As your vehicle has a four
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump
the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 215).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature, as
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, as damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high-load or
device (i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
213
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
214
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. Wet brakes result in reduced
braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car
wash or standing water to dry the brakes.
See Cleaning the Wheels (page 339).
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
See Warning Lamps and Indicators
(page 106).
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
E270480
This lamp also illuminates
momentarily when you switch
the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not
illuminate when you switch the
ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer. If the brake warning
lamp illuminates with the parking brake
released, have the system checked
immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
215
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Brakes
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: If the brake system
warning light remains illuminated or
flashes for more than four seconds after
you have released the parking brake,
there could be a problem with your
braking system. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: With the exception of
emergency conditions (for example, the
brake pedal is broken or is blocked), do
not apply the electric parking brake while
the vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor
road surfaces or weather conditions,
emergency braking can cause the vehicle
to skid out of control or off the road.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery is running out of charge.
Note: The electric parking brake makes
noises during operation. This is normal.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
You operate it with a switch instead of a
lever. The switch is on the center console
or to the left-hand side of the steering
wheel, on the lower part of the instrument
panel.
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake
E267156
Pull the switch upward.
E270480
The red warning lamp flashes
during operation and illuminates
when the parking brake is
applied.
Note: It remains illuminated for a short
period of time after you switch the ignition
off.
If it continues to flash or does not
illuminate, the system has malfunctioned.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
automatically apply when you shift into park
(P). See Transmission (page 202).
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in
an Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking
brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the
electric parking brake to slow or stop your
vehicle, you could cause damage to the
brake system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
216
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Brakes
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
E270480
The red warning lamp
illuminates, a tone sounds and
the stoplamps turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to
slow your vehicle down unless you release
the switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Push the switch downward.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until engine
has developed sufficient torque to prevent
your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull
away in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the
Electric Parking Brake
Close the driver door.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal and pull away
in a normal manner.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
electric parking brake has not released.
Manually release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake if the Vehicle Battery is
Running Out of Charge
Note: The electric parking brake does not
apply or release if the battery is low or has
no charge.
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery is running out of
charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle
(page 288).
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
217
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Brakes
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn
off if a malfunction is apparent or if you
rev the engine excessively. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
a forward gear when facing uphill, or
reverse (R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on. You cannot
turn the system on or off.
AUTO HOLD
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
218
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Brakes
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system turns off if
there is a malfunction or if you
excessively rev the engine.
The system is designed to apply the brakes
to hold your vehicle at a standstill after you
stop your vehicle and release the brake
pedal. This could be beneficial in certain
situations, for example when waiting on a
hill or in traffic.
Switching Auto Hold On and Off
E319161
Press the button on your console to access
the Auto Hold feature on the touchscreen.
Note: You can only switch the system on
after you close the driver door, fasten your
seatbelt and start the engine.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Make sure you switch the system off before
towing with your vehicle or before using an
automatic car wash.
Using Auto Hold
1. Use the brakes to bring your vehicle to
a complete stop. The auto hold active
indicator illuminates in the information
display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
auto hold active indicator remains
illuminated in the information display.
Note: The system only activates if you
apply enough brake pressure. If your vehicle
is on a steep slope, you need to press the
brake pedal harder before the system
activates.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
could apply the electric parking brake. The
brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
electric parking brake releases when you
press the accelerator pedal. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 216).
Note: If auto-start-stop turns off the
engine, auto hold remains active.
Note: The system deactivates if you shift
into reverse (R) and press the brake pedal.
3. Pull away in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes and the
auto hold active indicator turns off.
Auto Hold Indicator
E322410
E197933
The auto hold indicator
illuminates in the information
display when the system is on
and is either active or unavailable.
E322411
E197934
Illuminates when the system is
active. Your vehicle remains
stationary after you release the
brake pedal.
219
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Brakes
Illuminates when the system is on but
unavailable to hold your vehicle at a
standstill.
The system could be unavailable when any
of the following occur:
• During an active park assist maneuver.
• Your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
• The driver door is open.
• You do not fasten your seatbelt.
• You shift into reverse (R) before the
system is active.
220
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and
traction control light illuminates steadily
if the system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 111).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
221
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket
roof racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic
stability control system. In addition,
installing any stereo loudspeakers may
interfere with and adversely affect the
electronic stability control system. Install
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as
far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats
in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of
the electronic stability control system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the
laws of physics. It’s always possible to
lose control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
222
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 221).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 221).
223
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This
may cause reduced performance or false
alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
Note: If your vehicle has MyKey™, the
sensing system cannot be switched off
when a MyKey™ is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 61).
Note: Keep the sensors on the bumper or
fascia free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are
covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
Note: When you connect a trailer to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when you connect a
trailer to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 111). If your
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
switch the system off by pressing the
button.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 118).
REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
224
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The sensors are on the rear bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in reverse (R) and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
When the parking aid system sounds a
tone, the audio system may reduce the set
volume.
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the center of the rear
bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
E130178
The sensor coverage area is up to 70 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information
display.
The system detects large objects when
you shift into reverse (R) and any of the
following occur:
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed and an object is moving toward
your vehicle, for example another
vehicle at low speed.
If your vehicle remains stationary for two
seconds the audible warning turns off. If
your vehicle moves backward the tone
sounds again.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from the rear bumper, the audible
warning does not turn off.
225
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If the system does not detect an object,
the distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into reverse (R), the system
provides audible warnings and visual
indication when your vehicle is moving and
the detected object is moving toward your
vehicle. When you stop your vehicle, the
audible warnings stop after two seconds.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
FRONT PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The sensors are on the front bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P). When the parking aid system
sounds a tone, the audio system may
reduce the set volume.
226
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
The system turns off when the vehicle
speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h).
E187330
The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in
(70 cm) from the center of the bumper.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
system detects objects when your vehicle
is moving at low speed or an object is
moving toward your vehicle, for example
another vehicle at low speed. When you
stop your vehicle, the audible warning turns
off after two seconds.
If the transmission is in any forward gear,
the system provides audible warnings
when your vehicle is moving and an object
is within the detection area. When you stop
your vehicle, the audible warning turns off
after two seconds and the visual warning
turns off after four seconds.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information
display.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into any forward gear, the
system provides audible warnings and
visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below and the system detects
an object within the detection zone. When
you stop your vehicle, the audible warnings
stop after two seconds and visual
indication stops after four seconds.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from your vehicle, visual indication
remains on.
227
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
When you shift into neutral (N), the system
only provides visual indication if your
vehicle is moving at a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below,
for example, your vehicle is moving on a
slope, and the system detects an object
moving toward your vehicle. When you
stop your vehicle, visual indication stops
after four seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: If you switch traction control off, the
side sensing system also turns off.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
Note: The system does not detect an object
that is moving toward the side of your
vehicle, for example another vehicle moving
at low speed, if it does not pass a front or
rear sensor.
The system uses the front and rear
outermost parking aid sensors to detect
objects that are near to the sides of your
vehicle. The system displays them on a
virtual map in the information display as
your vehicle moves past them.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.
The system may not function if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on within a few seconds.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system activates.
• The traction control system activates.
To reinitialize the system, you may have to
drive your vehicle approximately 10 ft
(3 m).
E190458
228
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
The sensor coverage area is up to 24 in
(60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object within
the coverage area and the driving path of
your vehicle, an audible warning sounds.
As the object moves closer to your vehicle,
the rate of the tone increases.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into reverse (R), the system
provides audible warnings and visual
indication when detected objects are
within 24 in (60 cm) and are inside the
driving path of your vehicle. When you stop
your vehicle, the audible warnings turn off
after two seconds.
When you shift into any forward gear, the
system provides audible warnings and
visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below and the system detects
an object within the detection zone. When
you stop your vehicle, the audible warnings
turn off after two seconds and visual
indication turns off after four seconds.
When you shift into neutral (N), the system
only provides visual indication if your
vehicle is moving at a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below.
For example, your vehicle is moving on a
slope, and the system detects an object
moving toward your vehicle. When you
stop your vehicle, visual indication turns
off after four seconds.
If the system is not available, the side
distance indicator blocks do not display.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
229
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
The system assists parking into and out of
parking spaces. Sensors are used to detect
parking spaces. The system then steers,
accelerates, brakes and shifts gear as
required to maneuver into or out of a
parking space.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
The parking button is near the
transmission selector on the
center console.
Press the parking button to bring up full
screen notifications. Press either the
parking button or the soft keys on the
display screen to switch between Parallel
Park In, Perpendicular Park In or Parallel
Park Out parking modes.
Driving into a Parking Space
Note: The system detects other vehicles
and curbs to find a parking space.
Note: The system does not recognize
parking space lines and centers your vehicle
between objects.
Note: When parking perpendicularly, the
system backs your vehicle into parking
spaces.
1. Press the active park assist button.
Note: The system searches for parallel
parking spaces on the passenger side. Press
the active park assist button again to make
the system search for perpendicular spaces.
2. Use the direction indicator lever to
search for a parking space on the driver
or passenger side of your vehicle.
3. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft
(1 m) away from and parallel to the
other parked vehicles when searching
for a parking space.
Note: A tone sounds and a message
appears in the information display when
active park assist finds a suitable parking
space.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Release the steering wheel and shift
into neutral (N).
6. Press and hold the active park assist
button.
7. Release the brake pedal to allow the
vehicle to park.
Note: When parallel parking between
objects, the system parks closer to the
object in front of your vehicle to allow easier
access to your luggage compartment.
Note: When perpendicular parking, the
system aligns the front end of your vehicle
with the object next to it.
Note: When perpendicular parking, if the
system detects only one object, it allows
enough distance to open the door on either
side.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: When parking is complete the vehicle
shifts into park (P).
Leaving a Parking Space
The system assists leaving only parallel
parking spaces.
1. Press the active park assist button.
2. Use the direction indicator lever to
choose the direction to leave.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
230
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
4. Release the steering wheel and shift
into neutral (N).
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Press and hold the active park assist
button.
7. Release the brake pedal to allow the
vehicle to move.
Note: You can slow down your vehicle at
any time by pressing the brake pedal.
Note: After the system drives your vehicle
to a position where you can exit the parking
space in a forward movement, a message
appears instructing you to take full control
of your vehicle.
Canceling Active Park Assist
To cancel parking assistance at any time,
shift out of neutral (N).
Note: If you turn the steering wheel or open
the driver door the parking assistance also
cancels.
Pausing Active Park Assist
To pause parking assistance at any time,
release the active park assist button.
The vehicle stops moving until you press
and hold the active park assist button
again.
Note: If you open the passenger or rear
doors the parking assistance also pauses.
Active Park Assist Troubleshooting
Possible CauseSymptom
The system is unable to detect a vehicle, curb or object
to park next to, or in-between.
The system does not correctly
operate.
You may have switched traction control off.The system does not search for
a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must
be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice
or large accumulations of dirt. Blocked sensors can
affect how the system functions.
The system does not offer a
parking space.
The sensors in the front or rear bumper could be
damaged.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your
vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on
the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than
2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)
for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
231
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Possible CauseSymptom
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After
you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle
on a straight road for a short period of time.
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the
system from correctly aligning your vehicle.
The system does not correctly
position your vehicle in a
parking space.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be
correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained.
For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of
different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,
a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects
changes after your vehicle passes the space.
You are using a spare tire or a tire that is significantly
worn more than the other tires.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.
For example, driving from a heated garage into cold
outside temperature, or after leaving a car wash.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image could be
incorrect. All guide lines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
232
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Note: Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction time
to stop your vehicle.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’ s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the liftgate.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Upon a battery disconnect, the active
guidelines may not be functional until your
vehicle has been driven a short distance and
exceeds a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
233
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
E306774
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See General Information (page 111).
234
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator
E190459
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P) while the Delay Mode is ON, the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P) on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
• You enable the hand brake on vehicles
with manual transmission.
235
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 80).
Switching Cruise Control On
E71340
Press to set the system in
standby mode.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E71340
Press the button when the
system is in standby mode.
The system also turns off when you switch
the ignition off.
Note: The set speed erases when you
switch the system off.
SETTING THE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
system does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press the toggle button upward
or downward to set the current
speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the
information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the toggle
button upward to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold the toggle button upward
to accelerate. Release the button when
you have reached your preferred speed.
Press and release the toggle
button downward to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the toggle button
downward to decelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
236
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E280804
Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E71340
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
237
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
WHAT IS ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go
uses radar and camera sensors to adjust
the speed of your vehicle to maintain a set
gap from the vehicle in front of you in the
same lane while following it to a complete
stop. You can also engage the system to
follow a vehicle in front of you and adjust
set speed while stopped.
WHAT IS ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE
CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
uses radar and camera sensors to help
keep your vehicle in the lane by applying
continuous assistance steering torque
input toward the lane center on highways.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
setting operates normally.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE
CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
or contradicted by a lane centering
precaution. See Adaptive Cruise Control
Precautions (page 238).
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
if any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
changes or modifications to the steering
wheel could affect the functionality or
performance of the system. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as
entering or leaving a highway, on roads
with intersections or roundabouts, roads
without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: The system does not
control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: The system is not a
crash warning or avoidance system.
238
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controls. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
When Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep
grades, for example in mountainous areas.
The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent it from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE
CENTERING
Adaptive cruise control limitations apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
or contradicted by a lane centering
limitation. See Adaptive Cruise Control
Limitations (page 239).
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The system does not detect at least
one lane marking or when lanes merge
or split.
• You switch the direction indicator on.
• Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Areas under construction or new
infrastructure.
• When modifications to the steering
system have been made.
• When using a spare tire.
Note: The assistance steering torque is
limited and may not be sufficient for all
driving situations.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
may deviate from the center line.
239
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
LIMITATIONS - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
Sensor Limitations
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same
lane.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
E307893
The camera is mounted on the windshield
behind the interior mirror.
E307892
The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
240
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
sensor performance.
A message displays if something obstructs
the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control
– Information Messages (page 246).
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle image does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
Detection issues can occur:
E71621
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
241
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Optimal system performance requires a
clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 80).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
E144529
Press to set the system in
standby mode.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
E144529
Press when the system is in
standby mode, or switch the
ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Automatic Cancellation or
Deactivation
The system may cancel if:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
The system may cancel and set the parking
brake if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
the driver door after you stop your
vehicle.
• Your vehicle is held at a stop
continuously for more than three
minutes.
The system may deactivate or prevent
activating when requested if:
• A sensor is blocked.
• The brake temperature is too high.
• There is a failure in the system or a
related system.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL SPEED
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press the toggle button upward
or downward to set the current
speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E255686
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
242
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
from a Complete Stop
Press the toggle button upward
or downward while keeping the
brake pedal fully pressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Manually Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the toggle
button upward to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold the toggle button upward
to increase the set speed in large
increments. Release the button when you
reach the speed you prefer.
Press and release the toggle
button downward to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the toggle button
downward to decrease the set speed in
large increments. Release the button when
you reach the speed you prefer.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the speed you prefer. Press the
toggle button upward or downward to
select the current speed as the set speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL GAP
Press the button to cycle
through the four gap settings.
E255686
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Distance GapGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
243
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain the gap setting.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
information display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E280804
Press the button or tap the brake
pedal.
The set speed does not erase.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the
previously set speed and gap setting. The
set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Resuming the Set Speed from a
Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than three seconds, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle
to a complete stop and remains
stationary for more than three
seconds, press and release the button or
press the accelerator pedal to follow the
vehicle ahead.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
Use the accelerator pedal normally to
intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator illuminates and the vehicle image
does not appear in the information display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
244
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE
CENTERING
E262175
Illuminates when you switch
lane centering on. The color of
the indicator changes to indicate
the system status.
Gray indicates the system is on but
inactive.
Green indicates the system is active and
applying assistance steering torque input
to keep your vehicle in the center of the
lane.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO
E144529
Illuminates when you switch the
system on. The color of the
indicator changes to indicate the
system status.
White indicates the system is on but
inactive.
Green indicates the system is active and
the speed has been set.
SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE
CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Driver Assist..
3. Select Cruise Control.
4. Select Normal.
E71340
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, and the system does not
respond to lead vehicles. Automatic
braking remains active to maintain set
speed. The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
SWITCHING LANE CENTERING
ON AND OFF
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 81).
E262175
Press the button.
The indicator appears in the information
display. When the system is on, the color
of the indicator changes to indicate the
system status. See Adaptive Cruise
Control Indicators (page 245).
Note: Adaptive cruise control must be on
before you can switch lane centering on.
245
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Activating Lane Centering
The system only activates when all of the
following occur:
• You have adaptive cruise control with
stop-and-go on.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel.
• The system detects both lane
markings.
Note: If it does not detect valid lane
markings, the system stays inactive until
valid markings are available.
You can override the system at any time
by steering your vehicle.
System Alerts and Automatic
Cancellation
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
When the system is active and detects no
steering activity for a certain period of time,
the system alerts you to put your hands on
the steering wheel. If you do not react to
the warnings the system cancels and slows
your vehicle down to idle speeds while
maintaining steering control.
The system also alerts you if your vehicle
crosses lane markings without detected
steering activity.
Note: The system may detect a light grip
or touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
driving.
When an external condition cancels the
system, for example, no lane markings
available, a tone sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
If your vehicle starts to slow
down, you must provide steering
input to the wheel and press and
release the button to regain full system
performance.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The lane becomes too wide or too
narrow.
• The system cannot detect valid lane
markings.
• Lane markings are crossed.
Note: The system disables until the next
key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to
driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
– TROUBLESHOOTING
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages - Vehicles
With: Adaptive Cruise Control With
Lane Centering
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
Note: Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon
which cluster type you have.
246
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
ActionMessage
Make sure you return your hands to the steering wheel and
provide steering input.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Lane Centering Assist
Not Available
Adaptive cruise control must be on before lane centering can
be switched on.
For Lane Centering
Assist to work Turn On
Adaptive Cruise
247
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Information Messages - Vehicles
With: Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all
messages display or are available.
Note: Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon
which cluster type you have.
ActionMessage
A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a
blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you
restart your vehicle.
You have selected normal cruise control. The system does
not brake or react to traffic.
Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
Displays when the adaptive cruise is going to cancel and you
must take control.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
adaptive cruise and there is no lead vehicle in range.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
248
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
DRIVER ALERT
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest
breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). When below the activation
speed, the information display informs the
driver that the system is unavailable.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs,
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness reduces below a certain
threshold, the system alerts you using a
tone and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You can switch the system on or off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 111). When
active, the system monitors your alertness
level based upon your driving behavior in
relation to the lane markings and other
factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
249
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
The warning system has two stages. First,
the system issues a temporary warning
stating that you need to take a rest. This
message only appears for a short time. If
the system detects your driving alertness
reduces further, it may issue another
warning which remains in the information
display for a longer time. Press OK on the
steering wheel control to clear the warning.
System Display
When active, the system runs
automatically in the background and only
issues a warning when required. See
General Information (page 111).
Note: If you receive a warning you should
consider resting, even if the current
assessment is within the typical range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level changes to
grey for a short time and the information
display informs you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on
your vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
250
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or
touch on the steering wheel as hands off
driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. In Alert mode, the system provides
a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.
In Aid mode, the system provides steering
assistance by gently counter steering your
vehicle back into the lane.
When the system is functioning in the
combined Alert and Aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates
the steering wheel if the vehicle is still out
of the lane markings.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The on or off setting is stored until it
is manually changed, unless a MyKey is
detected. If the system detects a MyKey, it
defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.
E288067
Press the button on the direction indicator
stalk to switch the system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch the system on.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
251
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
E165516
Aid only – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the
vehicle, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
If your vehicle stays to one side of the lane
after the lane keeping aid corrects your
vehicle and then subsequently drifts out
of the lane again, the system only provides
an alert at the steering wheel.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
• Low.
• Normal.
• High.
System Display
E294544
When you switch the system on, a graphic
of lane markings appears in the
information display.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status. These colors represent the
following:
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:
252
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
White: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention on the indicated side.
Note: If your vehicle has lane centering
assist and the system is active, the walls
appear green instead of white.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane markings.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
253
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use the blind
spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
E255695
254
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone.
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
E309221
When the system detects a vehicle, an
alert indicator illuminates in the exterior
mirror on the side the approaching vehicle
is coming from. If you turn the direction
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
255
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
If the sensors become blocked, a message
may appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 118). The
alert indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 118).
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 111). When you switch
the system off, a warning lamp illuminates
and a message displays. When you switch
the system on or off, the alert indicators
flash twice.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The
cross traffic alert system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
Using Cross Traffic Alert
The system detects vehicles that approach
at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).
256
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
257
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When
Trailer is Attached
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
Cross traffic alert remains on when you
attach a trailer in vehicles that come with
blind spot information system with trailer
tow under the following conditions:
• You connect a trailer.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)
in the information display.
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 254).
Switching the System On and Off
To switch the system on or off, adjust the
setting. Depending on your vehicle options,
the setting could be in the following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 111).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 467).
Note: The system turns on every time you
switch the ignition on. To permanently
switch the system off, contact an authorized
dealer.
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator
E268294
When the system detects an
approaching vehicle, a tone
sounds, a warning lamp
illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
and arrows appear in the information
display to show which side the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
258
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
appears in the information display.
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
a message appears in the information
display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you, even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays instead of indication arrows when the system
detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert
Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean
the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays
in the information display. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and
watch the information display for a
steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message
returns, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects
an error, you may not feel a difference in
the steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power-assisted steering system. There is
no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort. Extreme
continuous steering may increase the effort
it takes for you to steer. This occurs to
prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering
system. If this should occur, you will neither
259
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
lose the ability to steer the vehicle
manually nor will it cause permanent
damage. Typical steering and driving
maneuvers will allow the system to cool
down and steering assist will return to
normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• An improperly inflated tire.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead
to a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during
cold and severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
adversely affect the system. Keep the
front camera and radar free of snow and
ice. Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system cannot
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain a safe distance
and speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
The system is active at speeds above
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and
pedestrian detection is active at speeds
up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours, or
a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system is designed to provide three levels
of functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
260
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
3. Active Braking
E255268
Alert: When active, a flashing visual
warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
Brake support: The system is designed
to help reduce the impact speed by
preparing the brakes for rapid braking.
Brake support does not automatically
apply the brakes. If you press the brake
pedal, the system could apply additional
braking up to maximum braking force, even
if you lightly press the brake pedal.
Active braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
the crash completely.
Note: Brake support and active braking are
active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
If the vehicle is equipped with a radar
sensor, included with adaptive cruise
control, then brake support and active
braking are active up to the maximum speed
of the vehicle.
Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Note: The system turns off when you select
the deep snow/sand drive mode.
Distance Indication and Alert (If
Equipped)
This feature provides the driver with a
graphical indication of the time gap to
other preceding vehicles traveling in the
same direction. The information display
screen shows one of the graphics that
follow.
E254791
Note: Distance indication and alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
261
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Time GapDistance GapGraphicsSensitivitySpeed
>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
0.6sec — 0.9sec
56–82 ft
(17–25 m)
YellowNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Evasive Steering Assist (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a
stationary vehicle or a vehicle traveling in
the same direction as your vehicle, the
system is designed to help you steer
around the vehicle.
The system only activates when all of the
following occur:
• The pre-collision assist system detects
a vehicle ahead and starts to apply
active braking.
• You turn the steering wheel in an
attempt to steer around the vehicle.
After you turn the steering wheel, the
system applies additional steering torque
to help you steer around the vehicle. After
you pass the vehicle, the system applies
steering torque in the opposite direction to
encourage you to steer back into the lane.
The system deactivates after you fully pass
the vehicle.
Note: The system does not automatically
steer around a vehicle. If you do not turn the
steering wheel, the system does not
activate.
Note: The system does not activate if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small
and a crash cannot be avoided.
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
Depending on your vehicle options, the
pre-collision assist settings may be in the
following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 111).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 467).
The following settings can be adjusted:
• You can change alert and distance
alert sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
• You can switch distance indication and
alert on or off.
• If required, you can switch active
braking on or off.
• If required, you can switch evasive
steering assist on or off.
Note: Active braking and evasive steering
assist automatically turn on every time you
switch the ignition on.
Note: If you switch active braking off,
evasive steering assist turns off.
262
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Blocked Sensors
E307090
Camera.1
Radar sensor (if equipped).2
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. If your vehicle is equipped
with a radar sensor, it is located behind the
fascia cover in the center of the lower grille.
With a blocked sensor or camera, the
pre-collision assist system may not
function or performance may reduce. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for when this message displays.
Camera Troubleshooting
ActionCause
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display screen.
263
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
screen.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. pre-collision assist automat-
ically reactivates a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The Pre-collision assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-collision assist automat-
ically reactivates a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front-
end impact.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
is equipped with a radar sensor, the radar
sensing zone may change. This could cause
missed or false detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
264
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
WHAT IS DRIVE MODE
CONTROL
The system delivers a driving experience
through a suite of sophisticated electronic
vehicle systems. These systems optimize
steering, handling and powertrain
response. This provides a single location
to control multiple systems performance
settings.
Changing the drive mode changes the
functionality of the following systems:
• Electronically power-assisted steering
system adjusts steering effort and feel
based on the mode you select. See
Steering (page 259).
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control
in adverse conditions or high
performance driving. See Stability
Control (page 222).
• Electronic throttle control enhances
the powertrain response to your driving
inputs.
• Transmission controls become
optimized with shift cycles tuned to
each mode.
• Four-wheel drive settings are optimized
and tuned to each mode.
• Electric vehicle mode selections may
be limited. See Plug-In Hybrid
Vehicle Operation (page 176).
The system tailors your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select.
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system for
proper operation. If a mode is unavailable
due to a system fault or change in gear
shifter position, the mode defaults to
Normal.
SELECTING A DRIVE MODE
Note: Drive mode changes may not be
available when the ignition is off.
Note: Button icon shown may vary from
your vehicle.
Note: Selected drive mode displays in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 118).
E306303
To select drive modes, use the console
mounted control.
DRIVE MODES
Deep Snow/Sand (If Equipped)
E295420
For snow or soft dry sand. When
stuck in deep snow, use this
mode to help get unstuck.
Note: Consider that your vehicle does not
have off-road classification.
Note: Using deep snow/sand mode on dry,
hard surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire wear. This mode is for slippery and loose
surfaces.
265
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Drive Mode Control
Eco
E295413
For efficient driving. This mode
helps deliver maximum fuel
efficiency and helps to increase
driving range.
Normal
E225310
For everyday driving. This mode
is a perfect balance of
excitement, comfort and
convenience. This is the default mode after
each ignition cycle.
Slippery
E295414
For less than ideal road
conditions, such as snow or ice
covered roads. Use this mode for
crossing terrain with a firm surface covered
with loose, wet or slippery material.
Slippery mode lowers throttle response
and, if provided with an automatic
transmission, optimizes shifting for slippery
surfaces.
Note: Using slippery mode on dry, hard
surfaces could produce some vibration,
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
tire wear. This mode is for slippery surfaces.
Sport
E246593
For sporty driving with improved
performance handling, and
response. This mode increases
throttle response and provides a sportier
steering feel. If equipped with automatic
transmission, the powertrain system
provides improved gear holding, helping
your vehicle accelerate faster.
266
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Drive Mode Control
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System (If
Equipped)
E142445
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)
E142446
Vehicles with the standard size spare tire
can adjust the load floor to two positions.
The front of the load floor can be placed
either on (for high position) or below (for
low position) the ledges behind the rear
seats. The rear of the load floor always sits
on the two small shelves located on the
liftgate trim.
LUGGAGE COVERS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that you
properly secure the luggage cover.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
on the luggage cover. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death in the event of a sudden
stop or crash.
Use the luggage cover to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
Removing the Luggage Cover
1. Open the liftgate.
E309671
2. Detach the retaining clips on the
liftgate trim panel.
267
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
E309672
3. Detach the retaining cord on the
luggage compartment trim panel.
Note: Support the luggage cover when
detaching the retaining clips.
4. Lift the luggage cover out of the
liftgate.
Stowing the Luggage Cover
The luggage cover can be stowed in the
luggage compartment.
Installing the Luggage Cover
1. Insert the luggage cover.
E309672
2. Attach the retaining cord to the
luggage compartment trim panel.
E309671
3. Insert the retaining clips into the
litfgate trim panel.
Note: Make sure to support the luggage
cover when inserting the retaining clips.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as maintain
a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles,
with higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Note: Do not use crossbars with a
moonroof. This will interfere with the
moonroof function. Using crossbars with a
moonroof may void your vehicle's warranty.
268
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
Maximum Recommended Load
Amounts
Note: The maximum roof load is based on
the load being evenly distributed on the
crossbars.
Maximum Recommended LoadDescription
0 lb (0 kg)Vehicles with a moonroof
100 lb (45 kg)Vehicles without a moonroof
Adjusting the Crossbars (If Equipped)
E299329
1. Loosen the crossbar bolt by using the
supplied tool or similar tool.
2. Move the crossbar to the new position.
3. Tighten the bolt by using the supplied
tool or similar tool.
Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
when you need them for carrying cargo.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
269
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
270
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
271
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
272
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading
the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
273
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
274
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
Note: See Recommended
Towing Weights (page 276).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 303).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop and load
capacity. When both the
loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
269).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
275
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Ford does not recommend disabling this
feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as
hill climbing), the driver has significant
trailer towing experience, and can control
trailer sway and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 118). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
267).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the following
chart.
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
frontal area for your vehicle
configuration listed in the following
chart.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
276
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Maximum Trailer
Frontal Area
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
1
Maximum
GCWR
Powertrain
20 ft² (1.86 m²)2,000 lb
(907 kg)
5,639 lb
(2,558 kg)
1.5L GTDI FWD
20 ft² (1.86 m²)2,000 lb
(907 kg)
5,810 lb
(2,636 kg)
1.5L GTDI AWD
30 ft² (2.79 m²)3,500 lb
(1,588 kg)
7,251 lb
(3,289 kg)
2.0L GTDI FWD
30 ft² (2.79 m²)3,500 lb
(1,588 kg)
7,403 lb
(3,358 kg)
2.0L GTDI
AWD
20 ft² (1.86 m²)1,500 lb
(681 kg)
5,705 lb
(2,588 kg)
2.5L PHEV
FWD
20 ft² (1.86 m²)1,500 lb
(681 kg)
5,375 lb
(2,437 kg)
2.5L FHEV
FWD
20 ft² (1.86 m²)1,500 lb
(681 kg)
5,505 lb
(2,498 kg)
2.5L FHEV
AWD
1
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
277
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 269).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped)
E168683
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
Note: Install the water proof protection cap
back onto the trailer towing connector
whenever it is not in use. This helps to
prevent water damage and trailer towing
connector malfunction.
Note: You cannot use a seven-pin trailer
wiring connector for your vehicle and the
trailer lighting equipment.
FunctionColor
Left direction indicator
and stop lamp
Yellow
Ground (-)White
Right direction indicator
and stop lamp
Green
Running lightsBrown
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
278
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a
trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle's brake system. Your
vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
WARNING: Do not tow a trailer
fitted with electric trailer brakes unless
your vehicle is fitted with a compatible
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controller. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death. For additional information and
assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
lamp wiring; this may damage the
electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
279
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 8-SPEED
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
– 8F24
Emergency Towing
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
Recreational Towing
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
280
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 8-SPEED
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
– 8F35
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the
ignition is in the accessory or on position
when being towed.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without
access to wheel dollies or a vehicle
transport trailer, it can be flat-towed with
all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission configuration,
under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Refer to the Manual Park Release
procedure. See Automatic
Transmission (page 202). Failing to
do so may result in damage to the
transmission.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
Place the front wheels on a two-wheel tow
dolly. If you are using a tow dolly, follow
the instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
We recommend towing your vehicle with
all four wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION – HF45
Emergency Towing
In the event your vehicle becomes disabled
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration)
under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is facing forward so that it
is towed in a forward direction.
• Shift the transmission into neutral (N).
If you cannot shift the transmission into
neutral (N), you may need to override
the shifter and enable Stay in Neutral
mode. Failing to do so may result in
damage to the transmission. See
Transmission (page 202).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 137).
281
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
You can tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground using the Neutral
Tow mode in the information display.
Alternatively, if you have a front-wheel
drive vehicle, you can tow with the front
wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly.
If you have an all-wheel drive vehicle, you
can tow with all four wheels off the ground
using a vehicle transport trailer. If you are
using a tow dolly or a vehicle transport
trailer, follow the instruction specified by
the equipment provider.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place your vehicle in Neutral Tow
mode with the following steps:
• Switch your vehicle on in accessory
mode.
• Press the menu button on the
controls on the steering wheel.
• Select Settings.
• Select Neutral Tow.
• Follow the instructions on the
information display.
• Fully press the brake pedal.
• Shift into neutral (N).
• Switch the ignition off.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
Note: Switching on Neutral Tow mode
requires battery power.
Note: If the parking brake is applied, a
message appears in the information display.
Note: If your vehicle has an ignition key, you
cannot remove the key from the ignition
when the transmission is in neutral (N) and
your vehicle is off.
Note: Start the engine and allow it to run
for a few minutes at the beginning of each
day, and every six hours or fewer. With the
engine running and your foot on the brake,
shift into drive (D) and then into reverse (R)
before shifting back into neutral (N). Before
continuing to tow, re-enable Neutral Tow
mode.
282
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Towing
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
283
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Hints
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
E266447
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat
designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
284
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Hints
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
285
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period supplied with
your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
286
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or
death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
287
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
- EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)/
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
WARNING: Make sure that the
cables are clear of any moving parts and
fuel delivery system parts.
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Attempting
to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission
damage.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: If you are using a jump pack or
booster box, follow that manufacturer's
instructions.
Note: In the illustration that follows, the
bottom vehicle represents the booster
vehicle.
288
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery. Pull the red rubber
boot backward.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) jumper cable to an
exposed metal part of the stalled
vehicle's engine, as shown in the
following illustration, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system,
or connect the negative (-) jumper
cable to a ground connection point if
available.
E309225
Starting the Engine
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and moderately rev the engine, or
gently press the accelerator to keep
your engine speed between 2000 and
3000 RPM, as shown in your
tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
289
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
- HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)/PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Attempting
to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission
damage.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
290
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Your vehicle has a 12-volt battery that has
two prongs accessible from under the
hood. Your vehicle can be jumped the
same way conventional vehicles can by
using these prongs. The illustration below
shows the two connector prongs used for
jump starting your vehicle.
E309691
A. Positive prong (+).
B. Negative prong (-).
Note: If you are using a jump pack or
booster box, follow that manufacturer's
instructions.
Note: In the illustration that follows, the
bottom vehicle represents the booster
vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery. Pull the red rubber
boot backward.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) jumper cable to an
exposed metal part of the stalled
vehicle's engine, as shown in the
following illustration, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system,
or connect the negative (-) jumper
cable to a ground connection point if
available.
291
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
E309226
Starting the Engine
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and moderately rev the engine, or
gently press the accelerator to keep
your engine speed between 2000 and
3000 RPM, as shown in your
tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
292
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
After disconnecting the jumper cables, let
the disabled vehicle sit in Ready to Drive
mode for several minutes to charge the
12-volt battery. The disabled vehicle can
charge the 12-volt battery even if the
gasoline engine is off. The 12-volt battery
receives power from the high-voltage
battery.
COLLISION, DAMAGE OR FIRE
EVENT
Guidance for Ford Motor Company
Electric and Hybrid-Electric
Vehicles Equipped With High
Voltage Batteries
(Vehicle Owner/Operator/General
Public)
Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicle
Considerations
In the event of damage or fire involving
an electric vehicle (EV) or
hybrid-electric vehicle (HEV):
• Always assume the high-voltage
battery and associated components
are energized and fully charged.
• Exposed electrical components, wires
and high-voltage batteries present
potential high-voltage shock hazards.
• Venting/off-gassing high-voltage
battery vapors are potentially toxic and
flammable.
• Physical damage to the vehicle or
high-voltage battery may result in
immediate or delayed release of toxic,
flammable gases and fire.
Vehicle Information and General
Safety Practices
• Know the make and model of your
vehicle.
• Review the owner’s manual and
become familiar with your vehicle’s
safety information and recommended
safety practices.
• Do not attempt to repair damaged
electric and hybrid-electric vehicles
yourself. Contact an authorized Ford
Dealer or vehicle manufacturer
representative for service.
Crashes
A crash or impact significant enough to
require an emergency response for
conventional vehicles would also require
the same response for an electric or
hybrid-electric vehicle.
If possible
• Move your car to a safe, nearby
location and remain on the scene.
• Roll down the windows before shutting
your vehicle off.
• Place your vehicle in Park, set the
parking brake, turn off the vehicle,
activate the hazard lights, and move
your key(s) at least 16 feet (5 meters)
away from the vehicle.
Always
• Call 911 if assistance is needed and
advise that an electric or hybrid-electric
vehicle is involved.
• Do not touch exposed electrical
components or the engine
compartment, as a shock hazard may
exist.
293
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
• Avoid contact with leaking fluids and
gases, and remain out of the way of
oncoming traffic until emergency
responders arrive.
• When emergency responders arrive,
tell them that the vehicle involved is an
electric vehicle or hybrid vehicle.
Fires
As with any vehicle, call 911 immediately if
you see sparks, smoke or flames coming
from the vehicle.
• Exit the vehicle immediately.
• Advise 911 that an electric or
hybrid-electric vehicle is involved.
• As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale
smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle,
as they may be hazardous.
• Remain a safe distance from the
vehicle and try to stay clear of the
smoke.
• Stay out of the roadway and stay out
of the way of any oncoming traffic
while awaiting the arrival of emergency
responders.
Post-Incident
• Do not store a severely damaged
vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside
a structure or within 50 feet (15
meters) of any structure or vehicle.
• Make sure that passenger and cargo
compartments remain ventilated (i.e.
open window, door or trunk).
• For vehicles in the United States, notify
Ford Motor Company 1-800-392-3673
(then follow the prompts on the voice
response menu), an authorized Ford
dealer or service center as soon as
possible as there may be other steps
to secure and discharge the
high-voltage battery.
• For vehicles in Canada, notify Ford
Motor Company 1-800-565-3673
(then follow the prompts on the voice
response menu), an authorized Ford
dealer or service center as soon as
possible as there may be other steps
to secure and discharge the
high-voltage battery.
• Call 911 if you observe leaking fluids,
sparks, smoke or flames, or hear
gurgling or bubbling from the
high-voltage battery.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
294
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
295
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
If your vehicle is configured as a
motorhome please call 1-800-444-3311
for support.
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
296
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
297
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
298
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
299
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
300
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
301
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1-800-333-0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1-800-565-3673Phone
302
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
The engine compartment fuse box is in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle's main
electrical systems from overloads.
When you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 325).
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
Note: Replace fuses with the same type
and rating. See Changing a Fuse (page
309).
E292669
303
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Not used.—1
Not used.—2
Not used.—3
Supplemental heater (gas).60 A4
Supplemental heater (gas).40 A5
Supplemental heater (gas).40 A6
Not used.—7
Not used.—8
Not used.—9
Starter motor.30 A10
Powertrain control module.15 A11
Powertrain control module.15 A12
Powertrain control module.15 A13
Powertrain control module.15 A14
Not used.—15
Not used.—16
Not used.—17
Powertrain control module.10 A18
Anti-lock brake system module.10 A19
Not used.—20
Not used (spare).5 A21
Battery electronic control module (hybrid).5 A22
Charge port light ring (hybrid).5 A23
Amplifier.20 A24
Not used.—25
Not used.—26
304
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Not used.—27
Brake on-off switch.10 A28
Powertrain control module (hybrid).5 A29
Electronic stability control (gas).10 A30
Transmission oil pump (hybrid).
Electronic power assist steering.5 A31
Body control module.30 A32
Front parking aid camera.10 A33
Rear view camera.
Blind spot information system.
Adaptive cruise control.
Not used (spare).10 A34
Heated steering wheel.15 A35
Powertrain control module (hybrid).10 A36
Horn.20 A37
Blower motor.40 A38
Not used.—39
Heated wiper park.15 A40
Amplifier.20 A41
Driver power seat.30 A42
Electric water pump (hybrid).50 A43
Trailer tow module.40 A44
Passenger power seat.30 A45
Not used (spare).20 A46
Heated seats.20 A47
Anti-lock brake control valves.40 A48
Anti-lock brake control pump.60 A49
Cooling fan.60 A50
305
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Moonroof.30 A51
DC/DC converter (hybrid).5 A52
Battery charge control module (hybrid).10 A53
Not used.—54
Not used.—55
Not used.—56
Data link connector.10 A57
Auxiliary power distribution box (hybrid).40 A58
Body control module.40 A59
USB smart charger.5 A60
Rear cargo power point.20 A61
Not used.—62
Not used (spare).30 A63
Power liftgate.30 A64
Not used.—65
Not used.—66
Not used.—67
Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor (gas).5 A68
Port fuel injectors.15 A69
Rear console power point.20 A70
Media bin power point.20 A71
Rear window wiper.20 A72
Not used.—73
Windshield wiper motor.30 A74
Heated exterior mirrors.10 A75
Heated backlight.30 A76
306
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Not used.—77
Air conditioning clutch.10 A78
Not used (spare).10 A79
Fuel pump.20 A80
Rear window washer pump.10 A81
Power inverter.40 A82
Not used.—83
Driveline control module.40 A84
Rain sensor.5 A85
Not used.—86
Not used.—87
Not used.—88
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
The fuse box is below the glove
compartment.
E293328
307
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
Not used (spare).5 A1
Not used (spare).5 A2
Not used (spare).10 A3
Ignition switch.10 A4
Lock.20 A5
Unlock.
Moonroof.10 A6
DC inverter.
Passenger door module.30 A7
Parking assist control module.5 A8
Electrochromatic mirror.5 A9
Image processing module A.
Extended power module.10 A10
Power liftgate.5 A11
Hands-free liftgate actuation module.
Telematics control unit module.
Head up display module.5 A12
Keyless keypad switch.
Driver door lock.15 A13
Driver door module.30 A14
Extended power module.15 A15
Not used (spare).15 A16
SYNC.15 A17
Receiver transceiver module.
Integrated control panel.
Wireless accessory charging module.7.5 A18
Headlamp switch pack.7.5 A19
Not used (spare).10 A20
Climate control.7.5 A21
308
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse
Rating
Fuse
Location
E-shifter module.
Instrument cluster.7.5 A22
Gateway module.
Steering column control module.
Audio unit.20 A23
Not used (spare).20 A24
Power windows.30 A25
Exterior mirrors.
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
CHANGING A FUSE
General Information
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire.
E253688
1. Pull the latch toward you and remove
the top cover.
E253689
2
3
2. Pull the connector lever upward.
309
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
3. Pull the connector upward to remove
it.
E253693
4. Pull both latches toward you and
remove the fuse box.
5. Turn the fuse box over and open the
lid.
Fuse Types
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
310
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E263274
1. Open the left-hand front door.
2. Fully pull the hood release lever and
let it completely retract.
Note: This action releases the hood latch.
3. Fully pull the hood release lever for a
second time.
Note: This action fully releases the hood.
4. Open the hood.
Note: There is no secondary latch under the
hood.
311
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
E193263
5. Support the hood with the strut.
Closing the Hood
1. Remove the strut from the catch and
secure it correctly in the clip.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
10–14 in (25–35 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
Warning Lamps and Indicators
E246598
Illuminates when the ignition is
on and the hood is not
completely closed.
Information Messages
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
close the hood.
Hood Ajar
312
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
E308193
Windshield washer fluid. See Washer Fluid Check (page 329).A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 320).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 316).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 316).D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 324).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 325).F
Power distribution box. See Changing a Fuse (page 309).G
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 318).H
313
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
E307705
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 329).A
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 320).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 316).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 316).D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 324).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 325).F
Power distribution box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 303).G
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 318).H
314
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)/PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
E291097
Windshield washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 329).A
Low temp coolant cap: See Engine Coolant Check (page 320).B
High temp coolant cap: See Engine Coolant Check (page 320).C
Engine oil filler cap: See Engine Oil Check (page 316).D
Engine oil dipstick: See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 316).E
Brake fluid reservoir: See Brake Fluid Check (page 324).F
Power distribution box: See Fuses (page 303).G
Air filter assembly: See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 318).H
315
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A B
E264320
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 311).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 313).
7. Reinstall the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See Under
Hood Overview (page 313).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 382).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
316
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 313).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 382). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
317
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - EXCLUDING: HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)/
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only parts that meet or exceed our
specifications.
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 485).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E299070
1. Using a screwdriver, loosen the clamp
on the air filter housing cover.
2. Gently pull the boot back away from
the air filter housing cover.
3. Release the two clips from the air filter
housing cover.
4. Remove the air filter housing cover.
5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing assembly to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
E299073
7. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
8. Install the air filter housing cover.
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
10. Reconnect the boot to the air filter
housing cover and tighten securely.
318
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 2.5L, HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)/
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (PHEV)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only parts that meet or exceed our
specifications.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 485).
Note: If you do not use the correct air filter
element, your vehicle warranty may be void.
E299071
1. Using a screwdriver, loosen the clamp
on air filter housing cover.
2. Gently pull the boot back away from
the air filter housing cover.
3. Release the two clips from the air filter
housing cover.
4. Remove air filter housing cover.
5. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing assembly to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
E299074
7. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
8. Install the air filter housing cover.
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
10. Reconnect the boot to the air filter
housing cover and tighten securely.
319
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen
the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
Note: For hybrid electric vehicles, your
vehicle has two separate cooling systems.
One for cooling the engine and a separate
system for cooling the inverter system
controller that is specific to the hybrid
operating system. The two systems operate
similarly, with the inverter system controller
cooling system generally operating at a
lower temperature and pressure. The
following instructions apply to all
powertrain types.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 485).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put engine
coolant in the windshield washer fluid
reservoir or windshield washer fluid in the
engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
320
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 375). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 375).
Using water that has not been deionized
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
375).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
321
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 375).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
322
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
323
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 485). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips, shifts
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking
fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid
from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system
could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
324
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
E170684
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
where the brake fluid level is relative
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
Note: If the brake fluid level is between the
MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, it
is acceptable.
Note: If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark or above the MAX mark, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 375).
Brake Fluid Service Interval
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which
degrades the effectiveness of the brake
fluid. Change the brake fluid at the
specified intervals to prevent degraded
braking performance.
For detailed interval information, see
Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
325
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle
electrical system. Make sure you
disconnect the battery cables from all
batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious
personal injury or property damage.
WARNING: For vehicles with
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement
is different. You must replace the battery
with one of exactly the same
specification.
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When your vehicle requires a battery
replacement, use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
vent tube, battery cover or shield.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because a computer electronically controls
your vehicle's engine, power from the
battery maintains some control conditions.
When you disconnect or have a new
battery installed, the engine must relearn
its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all the accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the
power windows bounce-back feature.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 93).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 407).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, you
could adversely affect the idle quality of
your vehicle until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you could experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
326
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If the system detects
excessive battery drain, it temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message could appear in the information
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. These messages are
only for notification that an action is taking
place, and not intended to indicate an
electrical problem or that the battery
requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases, after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time, keep your vehicle fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
could temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it could
adversely affect battery performance and
durability. This could also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
Battery Disposal
E107998
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
327
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp when adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp does need to be adjusted.
E307889
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp. The horizontal
edge of the brighter light should touch
the horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is non-adjustable.
328
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
our specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 375).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Clean the wiper blades and the windshield
to improve wiper performance.
Note: Do not move the wiper arm when the
ignition is on as it may cause damage to the
wiper motor.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
Front Wiper Blades
E129990
1
1
2
329
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
Rear Window Wiper Blade
E271380
1. Lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
CHANGING A BULB
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs
have cooled down before removing
them. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time you operate the headlamps.
Note: If you accidentally touch the bulb,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before using it.
Headlamp
E307881
Park/Turn lampA
High beam headlampB
Low beam headlampC
330
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
High beam headlamp
E307882
1. Remove service cap.
2. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it straight
out.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Low beam headlamp
E307883
1. Remove service cap.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it straight
out.
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Park/Turn lamp
E307884
1. Remove service cap, if applicable.
2. Remove bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it straight
out.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
LED Bulbs (If Equipped)
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs
1. If you are replacing the driver side bulb,
turn the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing the
passenger side bulb, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left.
331
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
E311716
2. Remove the six lower splash shield
push pins and pull the splash shield
back.
E311715
3. Disconnect the bulb electrical
connector.
4. To remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly, turn it counterclockwise,
then pull it straight out.
5. To install, perform these steps in
reverse order.
Replacing Direction Indicator
Bulbs
E307885
Direction IndicatorA
Side markerB
E307886
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in
the off position and open the liftgate.
2. Remove the bolt cover using a
standard flat tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the bolt from the lamp
assembly.
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle in an outboard
direction.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
332
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
6. Remove the direction indicator bulb by
turning the lower bulb socket
counterclockwise. Gently pull the bulb
straight out of the socket.
7. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly
Bulbs
E307887
1. Remove the screws with a flathead
screwdriver and pull the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb by turning the lower
bulb socket counterclockwise. Gently
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Replacing License Plate Lamp
Bulbs
License plate lamps are LED and are not
serviceable. See an authorized dealer if
they fail.
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs
High-mount stop lamps are LED and are
not serviceable. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
333
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
334
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’ s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
335
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’ s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
Immediately rinse away any over spray.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
336
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
side airbag system and affect
performance of the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
Mirrors
Do not clean the housing or glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or
instrument panel to avoid contamination
of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 338).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
337
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
Cleaning Discolored Area(s) on the
Instrument Panel Surface
1. With light pressure, use the soft side of
a damp sponge to clean the discolored
instrument panel surface. Use water
that is warmer than 122°F (50°C).
2. Using light pressure and a micro fiber
cloth made of 70% polyester and 30%
polyamid, completely dry the wet area.
3. If the instrument panel discoloration is
still present, repeat cleaning steps 1 –
2 to remove remaining discoloration.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
338
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
339
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery
cables.
Plugging in Your HYBRID
We recommend the following options for
your plug-in vehicle (PHEV) :
• Leave your vehicle plugged in. The 12
volt battery maintains power if left
plugged in. However, this periodically
uses electricity from the household
outlet.
• Connect a battery charger to your 12
volt battery and leave it on a
continuous, slow charge.
• Disconnect the 12 volt battery. If your
12 volt battery is located in the luggage
compartment, do not fully shut the
luggage compartment after
disconnecting the 12 volt battery. Only
leave the luggage compartment open
if your vehicle is stored in a locked
location.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
340
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of
your vehicle and the ground is less than
that of other models. Drive with extreme
care to avoid damage to your vehicle.
341
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 350).
You can find the recommended tire
inflation pressures can on the Tire Label,
which is on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver door. You can also find this
information on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver seating position.
We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
342
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
All-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with All-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. All-wheel drive vehicles allow you to
select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See All-Wheel Drive
(page 210). For information on transfer
case maintenance, See Maintenance
(page 311). You should become thoroughly
familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
On some All-wheel drive vehicles, the initial
shift from two-wheel to All-wheel drive
when the vehicle is moving can cause a
momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
In All-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the All-Wheel drive
system. If there is a significant difference
between the size of a spare and the
remaining tires, All-wheel drive
functionality may be limited.
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
343
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR
KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The temporary mobility kit contains
enough sealant compound in the canister
for one tire repair only. See your authorized
Ford dealer for replacement sealant
canisters.
The kit is located under the load floor in
the trunk. The kit consists of an air
compressor to re-inflate the tire and a
canister of sealing compound that will
effectively seal most punctures caused by
nails or similar objects. This kit will provide
a temporary tire repair allowing you to drive
your vehicle up to 120 mi (200 km) at a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to
reach a tire service location.
E175977
Air compressor (inside)A
Selector switchB
On and off buttonC
Air pressure gaugeD
Sealant bottle and canisterE
Dual purpose hose: air and repairF
Tire valve connectorG
Accessory power plugH
Casing/housingI
Bike/raft/sports ball adaptersJ
344
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
General Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become
severely damaged. Only punctures located
within the tire tread can be sealed with the
kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than 0.24 in (6 mm) or damage to the tire's
sidewall. The tire may not completely seal.
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect
tire performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above
50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest
authorized Ford dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation
pressure in the affected tire; if the tire
is losing pressure, have the vehicle
towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for
Use of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Kit
To ensure safe operation of the kit:
• Read all instructions and cautions fully.
• Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road and
away from moving traffic. Turn on the
hazard lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle doesn't move unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects,
such as nails or screws, from the tire.
• When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors
or in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the
vehicle's battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to
operate continuously for more than 15
minutes. This will help prevent the
compressor from overheating.
• Never leave the kit unattended during
operation.
• Sealant compound contains latex.
Those with latex sensitivities should
use appropriate precautions to avoid
an allergic reaction.
• Keep the kit away from children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C)
and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before
the use-by date. The use-by date is on
a label on the sealant canister and can
be seen through the rectangular
viewing window on the bottom of the
compressor. Check the use-by date
regularly and replace the canister when
the sealant expires.
• Do not store the kit unsecured inside
the passenger compartment of the
vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or crash. Always store the
kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve
stem on the wheel must be replaced
by an authorized Ford dealer.
• Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and
DVD player operation.
345
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E175978
* When inflation only is required
for a tire or other objects, the
selector must be in the Air
position.
What to do when a Tire Is
Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire's tread area
can be repaired in two stages with the kit.
• In the first stage, the tire will be
reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been inflated,
you will need to drive the vehicle a
short distance 4 mi (6 km) to distribute
the sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need to
check the tire pressure and adjust, if
necessary, to the vehicle's specified
tire inflation pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire
with Sealing Compound and Air
WARNING: Do not stand directly
over the kit while inflating the tire. If you
notice any unusual bulges or
deformations in the tire's sidewall during
inflation, stop and call roadside
assistance.
WARNING: If the tire does not
inflate to the recommended tire pressure
within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance.
WARNING: Do not run the engine
when operating the air compressor
unless the vehicle is outdoors or in a
well-ventilated area.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking
brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the
flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. Use
appropriate precautions to avoid any
allergic reactions.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the back of the compressor
housing.
3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by
turning the connector clockwise.
Tighten the connection securely.
E175979
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
346
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the warning sticker found on
the casing/housing and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the
center of the dash.
6. Start the vehicle leave the engine
running so the compressor does not
drain the vehicle’s battery.
E175981
7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant
position. Turn the kit on by pressing the
on/off button (B).
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on
the tire label located on the driver's
door or the door jamb area. The initial
air pressure gauge reading may indicate
a value higher than the label pressure
while the sealing compound is being
pumped into the tire. This is normal and
should be no reason for concern. The
pressure gauge reading will indicate
the tire inflation pressure after about
30 seconds of operation. The final tire
pressure should be checked with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.
E175982
9. When the recommended tire pressure
is reached, turn off the kit, unplug the
power cable, and disconnect the hose
from the tire valve. Re-install the valve
cap on the tire valve and return the kit
to the stowage area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 mi (6 km) to distribute the
sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
11. After 4 mi (6 km), stop and check the
tire pressure. See Second stage:
Checking tire pressure.
347
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure
WARNING: If the tire does not
inflate to the recommended tire pressure
within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance.
WARNING: The power plug may
get hot after use and should be handled
carefully when unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
E175983
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose
onto the valve stem by turning
clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position.
4. If required, turn on the compressor and
adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure shown on the tire
label located on the driver's door or
door jamb area. The tire pressure
should be checked with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.
5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve
cap on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area.
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister.
Sealant canisters and spare parts can be
obtained at an authorized Ford dealer.
Empty sealant canisters may be disposed
of at home. However, canisters still
containing liquid sealant should be
disposed of by your local authorized Ford
dealer or tire dealer, or in accordance with
local waste disposal regulation.
Note: After the sealing compound has been
used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving
distance is 120 mi (200 km). The sealed tire
should be inspected immediately.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing
the steps listed previously in the Second
stage: Checking Tire Pressure procedure.
348
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Removal of the sealant canister from
the kit
E175984
1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the compressor housing.
E175985
2. Unwrap the power cord.
E175986
3. Remove the back cover.
E175987
4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90
degrees and pull away from
casing/housing to remove.
Installation of the sealant canister to
the kit
1. With the canister held perpendicular
to the housing, insert the canister
nozzle into the connector and push
until seated.
2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down
into the housing/casing.
E175988
3. Snap the back cover back into place.
349
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E175989
4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) around the channel on the
bottom of the housing/casing.
E175990
5. Wrap the power cord around the
housing and stow the accessory power
plug into its storage area.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult your authorized Ford dealer
for assistance.
Be sure to check the sealant compound’s
use-by date regularly. The use-by date is
on a label located on the sealant canister
and can be seen through the rectangular
viewing window on the bottom of the kit.
The sealant canister should be replaced
when the sealant expires.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
350
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
351
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
352
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
353
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed ratingLetter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
354
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
355
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
356
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
357
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. We
recommend the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
found on the tire. You will find a
Tire Label containing the
manufactures recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
The recommended tire inflation
pressure is also found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch on the B-pillar, or on
the edge of the driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
358
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare
tire when you replace the road
tires or after six years due to
aging even if it has not been
used.
359
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver's door. If this information
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
360
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed
the maximum pressure indicated
on the sidewall of the tire to set
the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures
up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires;
spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A
tire can explode in as little as
three to five seconds.
361
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and
injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
362
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page
485).
Tire Rotation Diagram
E142547
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to about 45°F (7°C) or
below (depending on tire wear and
environmental conditions) or in snow and
ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
performance is affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you must drive
in those conditions, we recommend using
Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The
rubber compounds used in these tires lose
flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
19°F (-7°C). If the tires have been
subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warm
them in a heated space to at least 41°F
(5°C) for at least 24 hours before installing
them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
with the tires installed, or checking tire
inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply
heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage
periods and before use.
USING SNOW CHAINS
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
363
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
• Use 10 mm cables or chains only on
front axle with 225/65R17 tires.
• Not all S-class snow chains or cables
meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device.
• The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
• Do not use chains or cables on
225/60R18 and 225/55R19 tires.
• Install cables securely, verifying that
the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
• Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
364
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in
this chapter.
365
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E250820
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 111). The
low tire pressure warning light will turn on
if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
366
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible cause
Low tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflated
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
Flashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
367
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it
may not function.
Note: Only use tire sealants in roadside
emergencies as they may cause damage to
the tire pressure monitoring system sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 364). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that we provided with the
vehicle. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, replace it instead of repairing
it.
368
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your
vehicle.
369
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel,
place an appropriate block or wheel
chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: It is recommended that
the wheels of the vehicle be chocked,
and that no person should remain in a
vehicle that is being jacked.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight,
including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
authorized dealer.
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in
an emergency.
WARNING: Check that the vehicle
jack is not damaged or deformed and
the thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: The jack should be
used on level firm ground wherever
possible.
WARNING: Use only the specified
jacking points. If you use other positions,
you may damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or
the fuel lines.
WARNING: Switch the ignition off
and apply the park brake fully before
lifting vehicle.
WARNING: Park your vehicle so
that you do not obstruct the flow of
traffic or place yourself in any danger and
set up a warning triangle.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is supported by a jack.
E166722
WARNING: No person should place
any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
Note: The jack does not require
maintenance or additional lubrication over
the service life of your vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
3. Lift and remove the carpeted cargo
area floor to access the spare tire and
jack.
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Remove the spare tire and jack kit from
the spare tire compartment.
370
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: On Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles
"PHEV" you can find the jack and wrench
to the left of the spare tire.
E294118
Note: On Non Plug-in Hybrid Electric
Vehicles, you can find the jack and wrench
under the spare tire.
6. Remove the jack and the flat tire
retainer strap from the jack base.
E305308
7. Turn the jack hex nut drive screw
counterclockwise to detach the lug
wrench from the jack. This lowers the
jack and releases the mechanical lock.
E294117
8. Unfold the lug wrench for use.
E181744
9. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
E142551
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
371
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
11. The vehicle jacking points shown here
are also depicted on the warning
label on the jack. Small arrow-shaped
marks on the vehicle sills show the
location of the jacking points.
E145908
12. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise
the vehicle until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
E294119
13. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Note: For vehicles with full wheel covers
with exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel
nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or
damage to the wheel cover may occur.
14. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
15. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
16. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
374).
1
2
3
4
5
E306781
Stowing the flat tire
1. To store the jack kit on Non Plug-in
Hybrid Electric Vehicles "Non-PHEV",
fold the jack and wrench handle and
engage it to the bracket of the jack
base using the lug wrench pin.
Note: To store the jack and wrench on
Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles "PHEV",
fold the jack and wrench into the closed
position, and place the wrench into the
storage compartment. Position the jack
assembly into the closed position and make
sure the jack is fastened securely before you
drive.
2. When attaching the folded wrench on
the jack, swing the wrench upward and
adjust the jack height until the wrench
hook engages the hole on the jack.
Tighten the hex nut clockwise until
secure.
372
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E294121
3. Re-position the jack kit assembly into
the original vehicle position and secure
with the plastic wing nut. Make sure
the jack is fastened securely before you
drive.
4. Unblock the wheels.
5. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the
cargo area. Secure with the flat tire
retainer strap by following the next
steps:
E142906
6. Locate the cargo tie-down near the
seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
strap through the tie-down. Thread the
non-loop end through the loop.
E157926
7. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
8. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
opposite corner of the cargo area to
the tie-down used in Step 4. Thread
the retainer strap through the tie-down
and pull tight.
9. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
E143746
373
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Ib-ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
100 (135)M12 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
374
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationEngine
91 in³ (1,497 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneFuel type.
11:1Compression ratio.
1-2-3Firing order.
0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
Drivebelt Routing
E307322
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationEngine
122 in³ (1,999 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneFuel type
10:1Compression ratio.
1-3-4-2Firing order.
0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
375
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
The long drivebelt is on the first
pulley groove closest to the
engine.
A.
The short drivebelt is on the
second pulley groove farthest
from engine.
B.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)/PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
SpecificationMeasurement
152 in³ (2,490 cm³)Displacement.
Minimum 87 octaneFuel type.
13.0:1Compression ratio.
1-3-4-2Firing order.
0.051 in (1.3 mm)Spark plug gap.
376
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1939Air filter element.
FL-910-S
Oil filter.
1
BHEF-48H6Battery.
SP-550
Spark plug.
2
FP-89Cabin air filter.
WW-2502 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2051 (passenger side)
WW-1112 (rear window)
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 485).
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer. These
parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other
parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could
be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
377
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1939Air filter element.
FL-910-S
Oil filter.
1
BHEF-48H6Battery.
SP-578
Spark plug.
2
FP-89Cabin air filter.
WW-2502 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2051 (passenger side)
WW-1112 (rear window)
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 485).
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer. These
parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other
parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could
be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
378
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.5L, HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (HEV)/
PLUG-IN HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1948Air filter element.
FL-910-S
Oil filter.
1
BXT-99RT4-ABattery.
SP-530
Spark plug.
2
FP-89Cabin air filter.
WW-2502 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2051 (passenger side)
WW-1112 (rear window)
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 485).
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer. These
parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other
parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could
be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
379
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
380
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
7Eight-speed automatic transmission 8F24
8Eight-speed automatic transmission 8F35
5Automatic transmission-Hybrid H4F45
381
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)17.6 oz (0.5 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant (U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf
(Canada)
YN-33-A (U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA (Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil (U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®
(Canada)
YN-35 (U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid for automatic
transmissions that require MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid
could cause transmission damage.
382
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
QuantityVariant
8.5 qt (8 L)
1
8F24 automatic transmission.
11.6 qt (11 L)
1
8F35 automatic transmission.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-AMERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft® (Canada)
XT-12-QULV (U.S. & Canada)
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
7.7 qt (7.3 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft® (Canada)
VC-13DL-G (U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G (Canada)
383
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Oil
E142732
E275759
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage not
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
5.3 qt (5.05 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-B1Engine Oil - SAE 5W-20 - Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-20 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-20
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XO-5W20-Q1SP (U.S.)
CXO-5W20-LSP6 (Canada)
384
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C947-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20 - Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-Q1SP (U.S.)
E240522
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
14.8 gal (56.2 L)Front-wheel drive.
15.7 gal (59.5 L)All-wheel drive.
Grease
385
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-5-A (U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-20 (U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-1 (U.S.)
CXC-51-A (Canada)
386
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Power Transfer Unit
Capacities
QuantityVariant
0.35–0.45 qt (0.33–0.43 L)Without cooler.
0.43–0.54 qt (0.41–0.51 L)With cooler.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XY-75W85-QL (U.S. & Canada)
Rear Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
25.4 fl oz (0.75 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid /
Déconnecter le liquide du pont arrière Motorcraft®
(Canada)
XY-75W-QL (U.S. & Canada)
387
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
388
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
3.4 fl oz (100 ml)19.4 oz (0.55 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant (U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf
(Canada)
YN-33-A (U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA (Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil (U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®
(Canada)
YN-35 (U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
11.6 qt (11 L)
1
All.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
389
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-AMERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft® (Canada)
XT-12-QULV (U.S. & Canada)
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
8.7 qt (8.2 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft® (Canada)
VC-13DL-G (U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G (Canada)
390
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Oil
E142732
E276075
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage not
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
5.5 qt (5.2 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP (U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6 (Canada)
391
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
E240523
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
15.7 gal (59.5 L)All.
Grease
Materials
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-5-A (U.S. & Canada)
392
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Hydraulic Brake System
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-20 (U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause reduced brake performance
and not meet our performance standards.
Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-1 (U.S.)
CXC-51-A (Canada)
Power Transfer Unit
Capacities
QuantityVariant
0.35–0.45 qt (0.33–0.43 L)Without cooler.
0.43–0.54 qt (0.41–0.51 L)With cooler.
393
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XY-75W85-QL (U.S. & Canada)
Rear Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
25.4 fl oz (0.75 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid /
Déconnecter le liquide du pont arrière Motorcraft®
(Canada)
XY-75W-QL (U.S. & Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
394
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L,
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(HEV)/PLUG-IN HYBRID
ELECTRIC VEHICLE (PHEV)
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
4.7 fl oz (140 ml)19.4 oz (0.55 kg)All.
395
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant (U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf
(Canada)
YN-33-A (U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA (Canada)
WSS-M2C31-B2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil (U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant POE Oil / Huile
POE pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®
(Canada)
YN-34 (U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid for automatic
transmissions that require MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid
could cause transmission damage.
Capacities
QuantityVariant
5.0 qt (4.7 L)
1
All.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-AMERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft® (Canada)
XT-12-QULV (U.S. & Canada)
396
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
5.0 qt (4.7 L)Hybrid vehicle low temperature cooling
circuit.
9.6 qt (9.1 L)Hybrid vehicle high temperature cooling
circuit.
6.6 qt (6.2 L)Plug-In Hybrid vehicle low temperature
cooling circuit.
10.1 qt (9.6 L)Plug-In Hybrid vehicle high temperature
cooling circuit.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft® (Canada)
VC-13DL-G (U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G (Canada)
Engine Oil
E142732
E292282
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
397
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage not
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
5.7 qt (5.4 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C947-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20 - Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-0W20-Q1SP (U.S.)
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
14.3 gal (54.2 L)Hybrid vehicle.
11.2 gal (42.3 L)Plug-In Hybrid vehicle.
Grease
Materials
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-5-A (U.S. & Canada)
Hydraulic Brake System
398
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft® (Canada)
PM-20 (U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XL-1 (U.S.)
CXC-51-A (Canada)
Power Transfer Unit
Capacities
QuantityVariant
0.35–0.45 qt (0.33–0.43 L)Hybrid vehicle without cooler.
0.43–0.54 qt (0.41–0.51 L)Hybrid vehicle with cooler.
399
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft® (Canada)
XY-75W85-QL (U.S. & Canada)
Rear Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
25.4 fl oz (0.75 L)Hybrid vehicle.
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Disconnect Rear Drive Unit Fluid /
Déconnecter le liquide du pont arrière Motorcraft®
(Canada)
XY-75W-QL (U.S. & Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
400
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
The chart that follows specifies the
replacement bulbs. Use headlamp bulbs
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America to ensure lamp
performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs do not
damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and provide
quality bulb burn time.
Exterior Lamps
Trade numberFunction
H9Base headlamp low beam.
HB3Base headlamp high beam.
T20 AmberBase headlamp turn.
LED
Base headlamp side marker.
1
LED
Optional headlamp.
1
H8Base fog lamp.
LED
Optional fog lamp.
1
LED
Tail, brake lamp.
1
T20 AmberRear turn lamp.
T20Backup, reverse lamp.
401
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Trade numberFunction
W5WRear side marker.
LED
License plate lamp.
1
LED
High-mount brake lamp.
1
1
To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Interior Lamps
Trade numberFunction
LED
All interior lamps.
1
1
To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Note: To replace all instrument panel lights, see your authorized dealer
402
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CONNECTED VEHICLE
REQUIREMENTS
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle
network.
Some remote features require a
subscription. For additional information,
see the FordPass app. Some restrictions,
third party terms and message or data
rates may apply.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS
Evolving technology or evolving cellular
networks could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop
some features from functioning.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK
What Is the Modem
The modem allows access to a
range of features built into your
vehicle.
Enabling and Disabling the Modem
1. Select Settings.
2. Select FordPass Connect.
3. Select Connectivity Settings.
4. Switch connectivity features on or off.
Connecting FordPass to the
Modem
1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
and log in.
3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
4. Select the option for vehicle details.
5. Select the option to activate your
vehicle.
6. Make sure that the name on the screen
matches the name shown in your
FordPass account.
7. Confirm that FordPass account is
connected to the modem .
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A WI-FI NETWORK
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Wi-Fi.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Select View Available Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
403
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Connected Vehicle (If Equipped)
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
404
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Connected Vehicle (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see the Wi-Fi
hotspot name when I search
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device.
– System limitation.
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
405
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Connected Vehicle (If Equipped)
CREATING A WI-FI HOTSPOT
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it
for access to the Internet.
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting
is on.
3. Select Settings.
4. Make sure that you have Wi-Fi visibility
switched on.
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is
on.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
and Password
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Select Settings.
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.
4. Scroll to Hide password.
5. Uncheck the box.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot
1. On your device, turn on Wi-Fi and select
the hotspot from the list of available
Wi-Fi networks.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
Purchasing a Data Plan
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device.
2. If the portal does not open on your
device, open a website and it redirects
to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
Note: If you have an active plan, the system
does not redirect to the vehicle network
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
to purchase more data.
Note: If data usage information is available
in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
system does not remove your vehicle from
your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability.
CHANGING THE WI-FI
HOTSPOT NAME OR
PASSWORD
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select SSID: ___.
5. Enter your required SSID.
6. Select Done.
7. Select Password: ___.
8. Enter your required password.
9. Select Done.
406
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SYNC
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E286494
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Accessing the Sound Settings
E280315
Press and release the button.
407
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
Adjusting the Volume
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E248947
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
Muting the Audio
E285283
Press and release the button to
mute the playing audio.
Pausing or Playing Media
In media mode, press and
release the button to pause
playback. Press the button again
to resume playback.
In radio mode, press and release the button
to mute the radio. Press the button again
to unmute.
Returning to the Previous Screen
E281480
Press and release the button.
Selecting Media
E100027
Press the button to select media
mode.
Press the button again to display
the available media sources. Repeatedly
press the button to scroll through the
available media sources.
Scrolling Through the Menu
Options
E248947
408
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
Selecting a Menu Option
E248946
Selecting the Radio
Press release the button to
select radio mode.
Press and release the button
again to display the available radio
sources. Repeatedly press the button to
scroll through the available radio sources.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Note: The button may be on the volume
control.
Switching the Display On and Off
E272035
Press and release the button.
Using Apps
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device.
Using a Cell Phone
Press and release to make a call
from a recent call list, contact
list or dial a number.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
Press and release the button to
skip to the next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press and release the button to
return to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in the category you
select.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SYNC 3
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
409
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E289731
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features.
Adjusting the Volume
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E248947
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
Muting the Audio
E285283
Press and release the button to
mute the playing audio.
Pausing or Playing Media
In media mode, press and
release the button to pause
playback. Press the button again
to resume playback.
In radio mode, press and release the button
to mute the radio. Press the button again
to unmute.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Note: The button may be on the volume
control.
410
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
Switching the Display On and Off
E272035
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
Press and release the button to
skip to the next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
Press and release the button to
return to the beginning of a track.
Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in the category you
select.
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts, where
available, in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode, only, if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
411
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
412
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
1
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
413
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
414
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
Locating Your ESN
With satellite radio as the source, use the
touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
467).
2. Select SiriusXM.
3. Select SiriusXM information.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or Siri-
usXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
415
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
USB A
E201595
USB C
E301114
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
Locating the USB Ports
The USB ports may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the lower instrument panel.
Note: The number and type of USB ports
may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 161).
416
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your Bluetooth
enabled cellular phone and portable media
player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance
and applications via SYNC AppLink.
*
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
SYNC support is available at your regional
Ford website. See SYNC™
Troubleshooting (page 425).
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
417
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when you connect the cellular phone or
media player. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
No one can access system data without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 421).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
Gives you available commands you can use
on the current screen.
Help
Gives you a list of possible voice
commands.
List of Commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by pressing seek
up, seek down, or holding the voice button
for two or more seconds.
Cancel
418
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
Interaction Mode Standard
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Interaction Mode Advanced
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
Phone Confirmation Off
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
Phone Confirmation On
419
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Pairing a Phone
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the Settings button.
3. Select Bluetooth from the menu.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
Pair Phone
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like place a phone call
and access text messages.
When prompted, say a command. See the
following table for examples of
commands.
Voice Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Call ___
Dial ___
Text Messages
420
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
contact or phone number.
Phone Controls
Use the phone buttons on your steering
wheel to answer, reject, or hang up a call.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Scroll through the menu to view
contacts, text messages, and the
phone dialer.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications (if your
phone is compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the
system will not dial for help which could
delay response time, potentially
increasing the risk of serious injury or
death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911
Assist to make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
five seconds of the crash, the system or
phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your
phone in a secure location in your vehicle
so it does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
421
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 44). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 286).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press the Settings button then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Select the desired option, on
or off.
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle are
able to talk with the operator. Be prepared
to provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
422
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website
Note: Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled
Apps will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Mobile Apps button to access
the menu on-screen. Then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app.
Find
Mobile
Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button, then when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Applications
SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.List Applications
Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible
mobile apps.
Find Applications
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.Help
423
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
• To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
SYNC supports digital media sources
including: iPod, Bluetooth devices, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports
audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Media Sources
The AUX or MEDIA button allows you to
view and select available media sources.
Press the AUX or MEDIA button to view
your sources. Use the directional arrows
and OK button to select your source. You
can also use the steering wheel audio
controls.
424
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Audio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like play a specific song
or album, or tune to a radio
station. When prompted, say a command.
See the following table for example
commands. Not all commands may be
available on your vehicle.
Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Pause
Play
AM ___
FM ___
CD Player
Sirius Channel ___
USB
Bluetooth Audio
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as an
artist, station, or media source.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use your regional Ford website at any time
to check your phone's compatibility,
register your account and set preferences
as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during
certain hours).
Website(s)Market
www.SYNCMyRide.comNorth America
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.sync-
maroute.ca
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
425
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
426
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Press the Phone button to
return to the Phone menu.
You are on the Select a
Character screen.
I cannot return to the Phone
menu when selecting a
contact.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
427
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Switch radio bands and
return to Sirius or switch the
feature off. You can then
change the Sirius station
using the directional
buttons.
Sirius Replay is active.
I cannot change the Sirius
station.
428
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
429
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
430
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some appsAppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
431
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
432
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
433
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
About SYNC
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Using the Touchscreen
E293823
Status bar.A
Home screen.B
Clock. See Settings (page 467).C
Outside air temperature.D
Feature bar.E
Status Bar
Cell phone microphone muted.
Audio system muted.
Software update installed.
Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
434
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Automatic crash notification
system off.
Cell phone network signal
strength.
Vehicle data sharing on.
Vehicle location sharing on.
Vehicle data and vehicle location
sharing on.
Wireless charger active.
Feature Bar
E100027
Select to use the radio, a USB, a
media player or a Bluetooth
device. See Entertainment
(page 443).
E283811
Select to adjust climate settings
See Manual Climate Control
(page 137).
Select to make calls and access
the phonebook on your cell
phone. See Phone (page 452).
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page
454).
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page
465).
E280315
Select to adjust system settings.
See Settings (page 467).
Cleaning the Touchscreen
See Cleaning the Interior (page 337).
Updating the System
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Downloading an Update
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
local Ford website.
2. Download the update.
Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
meet the minimum requirements detailed
on the website.
4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
Installing an Update
Note: You can use the system when an
installation is in progress.
1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
the USB ports.
2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
Note: Installation starts automatically
within 10 minutes.
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Select System Wi-Fi.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
435
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Switching Automatic System Updates
On
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Switch Automatic System Updates
on.
The system is now set to check for and
receive system updates when it is
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Note: You can use the system when a
download is in progress.
Note: If the system is disconnected from
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in
progress, the download continues the next
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi
network.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to the local Ford
website.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
436
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Help
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth
connected device.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
437
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionVoice command
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse artist The Beatles" or "Browse genre
folk".
Browse ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Album ___
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
Browse Podcast ___
1
This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands (If Equipped)
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).
Set Temperature ___
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 467).
Pair Phone
438
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309” .Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
439
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.
Find the Nearest
<POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous
Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
440
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionVoice command
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app, followed by
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
441
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Call Confirmation On
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Call Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or
turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease
the fan speed to the setting you prefer.
442
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
E297845
Audio source. Select to choose
a different audio source.
A
Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
B
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu Item
AM
FM
SIRIUS
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
443
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. We are not responsible for any such
programming changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
444
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 467).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 467).
445
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Siri-
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
446
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide or the
Sirius XM Settings tile to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 467).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
447
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
448
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
Station Issue Form
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
449
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. The vehicle
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
450
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
451
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
USB Ports
E285280
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 465).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Check the compatibility of your device on
the regional website.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone
and switch Bluetooth on.
Select the phone option on the
feature bar.
452
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
1. Select Add Phone.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the number on your cell
phone matches the number on the
touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone.
4. Download the phonebook from your
cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting
at any time.
Using Your Cell Phone
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls.
Contacts
Display a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to
alphabetically sort your contacts.
Change Phone
Display the list of paired or connected
devices that you can select.
Phone Settings
Change ring tones, alerts or pair another
phone.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
Mute
Mute the microphone.
Text Messaging
Setting Text Message Notification
iOS
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on.
Android
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on.
453
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Using Text Messaging
DescriptionMenu Item
Hear the text message.Hear It
View the text message.View
Call the sender.Call
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply
Apple CarPlay (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Apple
CarPlay.
Switching Apple CarPlay Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.
2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
Android Auto (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: You might need to enable Android
Auto from the settings menu.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android
Auto.
Switching Android Auto Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Android Auto.
2. Switch Android Auto off.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: For more information, refer to our
website.
Select the navigation option on
the feature bar.
E297557
Map view menu.A
Zoom out.B
Zoom in.C
Route guidance menu.D
Destination entry menu.E
454
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
DescriptionItem
Enter a destination address.Search
Display and select from a list of previous destinations.Previous Destinations
Set your saved home address as your destinationHome
Set your saved place of work as your destination.Work
Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Favorites
Setting a Destination Using the Text
Entry Screen
E297558
Text entry field.A
Automatic suggestions based on
the text you enter.
B
Information icon.C
Search.D
Keyboard settings.E
Note: Select one of the suggestions to
copy the detail to the text entry field.
You can search by entering all or part of
the destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City,
Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you do
not specify a location, the system will
use the current vehicle location. You can
specify a location by address, city, state
or zip code. For additional search support,
please visit: support.ford.com.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand
corner of the main map to display estimated
time of arrival, remaining travel time or
distance to destination.
455
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination Using the Map
Screen
E297559
Re-center the map.A
Selected location.B
3D map rotation. Swipe left or
right.
C
Start route guidance.D
Destination name.E
Select the location on the map.
Select Start to begin route guidance.
Changing the Format of the Map
Display the map in one of the following
formats:
• A two-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
top of the screen.
• A two-dimensional map with north
toward the top of the screen.
• A three-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
front.
Zoom
Display more or less detail on the map.
Note: You can use pinch gestures to zoom
in and out. Place two fingers on the screen
and move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Route Guidance
E297560
F
A
Turn indicator. Select to hear the
last voice prompt.
A
Point of interest.B
Estimated time of arrival,
distance to destination or time
to destination.
C
Current road.D
Mute guidance prompts.E
Cancel route guidance.F
Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays.
456
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Route Guidance Menu
DescriptionMenu Item
Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.Screen View
View a full screen map when route guidance is active.Full Map
View highway exit information for your current route.Highway Exit Info
View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid
it.
Turn List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information
by pressing this button. This information requires an active
subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route
is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a
route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Traffic List
Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 467).Navigation Settings
View information about your current location.Where Am I?
Cancel route guidance.Cancel Route
View the entire current route on the map.View Route
View an alternative route compared to your current one.Detour
Change the order or remove waypoints.Edit Waypoints
The system determines the order of waypoints for you.Optimize Order
Go to the next screen and start the new route.Go
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted
the volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and
then adjust the volume to the desired level.
Muting Guidance Prompts
Select the mute option on the
screen to mute guidance
prompts.
Note: The system mutes the next and all
future guidance prompts.
Adding Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
You can add up to five waypoints.
1. Select the search option on the map.
2. Set a destination.
3. Select Add Waypoint.
4. Select Go.
457
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Canceling Route Guidance
Select the route guidance menu
option on the active guidance
screen.
Select Cancel Route.
E294817
Note: The route guidance menu option is
always in the bottom right-hand corner of
the main map.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
458
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores.
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)
The Michelin travel guide is a service which
provides additional information about
certain places of interest, for example
restaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Points
of interest that have Michelin travel guide
information display a button to show you
more information. Push the button to see
the additional information. If you have
paired your phone with the system, you
can press the phone button to directly
establish a call with the selected point of
interest.
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
The navigation system map data may
contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time,
changing circumstances, sources used and
the nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results. Inaccurate speed limit
information, turn restrictions and other
road attributes may affect the determined
route and associated guidance
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership. Depending on your purchase
agreement, you might be eligible for free
Map update. You can choose to download
the Map data update onto a USB, order a
USB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic
updates. To update your Map data over
Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to
a Wi-Fi access point. Map Data files are
large, so it is highly recommended to
perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may
apply. For USB updates, free map update
eligibility, and other details, contact
dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United
States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539
in Mexico or visit our local website for more
information.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION
Power Flow
E304437
The Power Flow information for
your plug-in hybrid vehicle is
available through the Home
screen or under Apps.
Vehicle Operational States
Power will flow to or from the front and
rear wheels depending on operational
state and drive conditions.
459
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
• Idling: The vehicle is running and in Park
(P). The engine and, or the high voltage
battery are on.
• Electric Driving: The vehicle is running
and in Drive (D) or Neutral (N). The
high voltage battery provides power to
the wheels.
• Hybrid Driving: The vehicle is running
and in Drive (D) or Neutral (N). The
engine and the high voltage battery
provide power to the wheels.
• Engine Driving: The vehicle is running
and in Drive (D) or Neutral (N). The
engine provides power to the wheels.
• Regenerative Braking: The vehicle is
running in Drive gear and is slowing
down. Power captured by the
regenerative braking system is sent
back to the high voltage battery.
• Charging: The vehicle is plugged in and
the high voltage battery is being
charged.
Engine On Due To
The following conditions help to explain
why the engine is on, and what you can do
to allow all electric operation.
• Drive Power: The engine is on due to
accelerator pedal pressure or speed
control activation. Reduce pressure on
the accelerator pedal or switch off the
speed control to return to full electric
mode.
• High Speed: The engine is on because
the vehicle speed exceeds the level for
full electric operation. Reduce the
speed to return to electric operation.
• Heater Setting: The engine is on
because of the heater setting. Reduce
or turn off the heater setting to return
to electric operation.
• Neutral Gear: The engine is on because
the vehicle is in Neutral (N). Shift out
of neutral gear to return to electric
operation.
• Engine Cold: The engine is on because
it is cold. The vehicle returns to electric
operation once the engine is sufficiently
warm.
• Battery Charging: The engine is on to
charge the high-voltage battery. The
vehicle returns to electric operation
once the battery is charged.
• Low Gear: The engine is on because
the vehicle is in low gear. Shift out of
low gear to return to electric operation.
• Normal Operation: The engine is on to
optimize vehicle operation. The vehicle
returns to electric operation when
possible.
• Low Use: The engine is on to maintain
engine oil quality. The vehicle returns
to electric operation when low engine
use mode is complete. See Plug-In
Hybrid Vehicle Operation (page 176).
• Engine Braking Active: The engine is on
to provide increased powertrain
braking. This can occur when you turn
on the grade assist feature, when
speed control is on or when driving with
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Turning off grade assist or speed
control may allow the vehicle to return
to electric operation.
• Battery Temperature: The engine is on
due to high or low high-voltage battery
temperature. This is a normal operating
condition. The vehicle returns to
electric operation when possible.
• Drive Mode: The engine is on due to the
drive mode selection. Select an
appropriate drive mode for electric only
operation.
460
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Charge Settings
E304452
The Charge Settings information
for your plug-in hybrid vehicle is
available through the Home
screen or under Vehicle Settings. To
Improve your charging experience, your
vehicle has the following convenience
features.
Charge Times
Once you set up Charge Times for a
specific charging location, your vehicle
prioritizes charging based on your preferred
time settings. You can set two preferred
charging time windows for weekdays and
two for weekends. This feature allows you
to take advantage of electric utility rate
plans that offer lower pricing during certain
times of day. Contact your utility company
to see what plans are available.
Note: You can also set up and use these
features using the FordPass app.
Departure Times
Setting Departure Times allows you to
control charging schedules and have the
vehicle cabin heated or cooled while
plugged in, so your vehicle is ready to drive
when you are. By setting a departure time
your vehicle can use your charge time
settings to minimize your electricity costs
but still prioritize finishing charging before
your scheduled departure. A calendar view
allows you to program two departure times
per day for each day of the week.
Note: You can also set up and use these
features using the FordPass app.
Charge Settings Screen
E304457
Charging status.A
Charging time information.B
High voltage battery state of
charge.
C
Plug and charging status.D
Charging Status
Displays the present state of the charging
system. See Charging the High Voltage
Battery (page 194).
461
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Description and ActionCharging Status
Your vehicle is unplugged and starts char-
ging when plugged in.
Will charge when plugged in.
Your vehicle is unplugged at a saved loca-
tion with Charge Times is enabled. Charging
is scheduled to start at the time displayed
based on your charge time settings. You
must plug in prior to the start time shown
for the vehicle to begin charging at that
time.
Will wait for preferred charge time.
Your vehicle is plugged in at a saved loca-
tion with Charge Times enabled. Charging
starts at the time displayed, which is based
on your Charge Times settings.
Waiting for preferred charge time.
Your vehicle is plugged in and using power
to charge the high voltage battery or run
electrical systems.
Charging.
Your vehicle is finished charging.Charged.
Your vehicle is plugged in and there is a
fault within the vehicle charging system.
Unplug and plug back in. If the fault is still
present, contact your dealer.
Vehicle charge fault.
Your vehicle is plugged in and a fault is
detected with the charge station or char-
ging cord. Check the charging cord and the
charge station or electrical supply.
Charge station fault.
A charging coupler is plugged into the
vehicle but there is no connection with a
charging power source.
Charge station not detected.
Your vehicle is plugged in but cannot
communicate with the charging station.
Contact the station provider.
Incompatible charge station.
Your vehicle is plugged in and charging is
paused at the charge station.
Charge station paused.
462
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Charging Time Information
Displays estimates of how long your
vehicle will take to fully charge when
plugged into a high or low power charger.
• High power estimate: The minimum
time to a 100% charge using a high
power charger.
• Low power estimate: The longest time
to a 100% charge using a low power
charger.
When charging, the start and estimated
end time are displayed. When your vehicle
is not plugged in and at a location with
Charge Times enabled, the start and end
times display based on known charging
power.
Note: Charging durations and end times are
only estimates. Certain conditions may
result in longer charging times. See
Charging the High Voltage Battery (page
194).
High Voltage Battery State of Charge
Displays the remaining charge percentage
with 100% representing the total amount
of energy you can get from an external
charge.
Plug and Charging Status
Displays the plug and charging status
icons.
E304458
Not plugged in.
E304459
Plugged in and not currently
charging.
E304460
Plugged in and charging.
E304461
Plugged in and waiting to charge
based on charge time settings.
Charge Preferences
Touch the button to access Charge Time
and Departure Time settings. Once set up,
additional information and settings are
displayed on the charge settings screen
once Charge Time or Departure Times are
set up.
E304456
Charge Times on and off switch.A
Charge Times location name and
charging time information.
B
Departure Times on and off
switch.
C
Next departure time and cabin
temperature.
D
Charge Times On and Off Switch
This switch is visible when your vehicle is
at a saved Charge Times location. Use the
switch to turn your charge time settings on
and off for this location.
463
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Charge Times Location Name and
Charging Time Information
The location name displays when your
vehicle is at a saved Charge Times location.
The charging start time is displayed along
with the charging end time and associated
charge level.
Departure Times On and Off Switch
This switch is visible when you have at
least one departure time set. Use this
switch to turn all departure times on and
off. Switching departure times off does not
delete your settings.
Next Departure Times and Cabin
Temperature
Displays the next departure time and
associated cabin temperature setting.
Charge Time Settings
Follow these steps to set a preferred
charge time for a charging location.
1. Select Charge Preferences on the
Charge Settings screen.
2. Select Charge Time Setup on the Edit
Charge Preferences screen.
3. Select Add New Location on the
Charge Times screen. You can also edit
settings for previously saved locations
from this screen.
4. Select an address from the Recent
Charge Locations screen.
5. On the Confirm Location for Charge
Times screen, you can edit the location
name and set a max charge level as
desired. Once you have your desired
location name and max charge level,
select Continue to Schedule.
Note: Charging will stop when your vehicle
reaches the max charge level.
6. Select WEEKDAY or WEEKEND on the
Preferred Charge Times screen.
7. On the Select preferred WEEKDAY or
WEEKEND Charge Times screen, use
the circular 24 hour clock to select your
charging time windows. You can select
up to two time windows by pressing
and dragging across the hour buttons.
When you have selected your preferred
times then press Next to return to the
Preferred Charge Times screen. Repeat
for WEEKEND or WEEKDAY as desired.
Once you are done setting preferred
charge times, press Save.
Note: Selecting all or none of the 24 hours
results in any time of day given equal priority
for charging.
8. Your saved location now shows on the
Charge Times screen. Select Done to
return to the main charge settings
screen. Whenever your vehicle is at a
saved charging location the charge
settings screen displays the location
name, and the charging times are
based on your Charge Time settings for
that location plus the next Departure
Time.
Note: Reaching your max charge level by
your next Departure Time is always the
priority. When Charge Times are set,
charging outside your preferred charging
time windows could be necessary in order
to finish by your next Departure Time. A
notification appears when this condition
occurs.
Note: When your max charge level cannot
be reached by your next departure time, a
notification appears which includes an
estimate of the charge level you will have
at your departure time.
Departure Time Settings
1. Select Charge Preferences on the
Charge Settings screen.
2. Select Departure Time Setup on the
Edit Charge Preferences screen.
464
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
3. Two time settings show for each day
of the week on the Departure Times
schedule screen. Select any one.
4. On the Departure Time settings screen,
set your desired departure time, cabin
temperature and days of the week to
repeat. Press Save.
5. Your settings are now shown on the
Departure Times schedule screen.
Press Back two times to return to the
main charge settings screen. The next
departure time and cabin temperature
setting display.
Note: Cabin conditioning can perform
differently depending on if you plug in with
the included convenience cord or a higher
power charging station. The power available
for conditioning is limited to the charging
station power available.
Note: Your vehicle may not always reach
the set cabin temperature due to charging
and ambient temperature conditions. This
is normal operation
APPS
The system allows you interact with select
mobile apps while keeping your eyes on
the road. Voice commands, your steering
wheel buttons, or a quick tap on your
touchscreen give you advanced control of
compatible mobile apps. You can also
stream your favorite music or podcasts,
share your time of arrival with friends, and
keep connected safely.
When you start an app through the system
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review
and change the permissions that you have
granted at any time when your vehicle is
not moving. We recommend that you
check your data plan before using your
apps through the system. Using them
could result in additional charges. We also
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and
privacy policy before using their app. Make
sure that you have an active account for
apps that you want to use through the
system. Some apps will work with no
setup. Others require you to configure
some personal settings before you can use
them.
Note: For more information about available
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
Using Apps on an iOS Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 452).
2. Connect your device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable.
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if
you want to use a navigation app. When
using a navigation app, keep your device
unlocked and the app open.
Using Apps on an Android Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 452).
2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 452).
465
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
3. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
Note: The system searches and connects
to compatible apps that are running on your
device.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the
USB port to establish a connection with
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
enabled.
Using Mobile Navigation on an
Android Device
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 452).
3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via
USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
4. Select the apps option on the feature
bar.
5. Select the navigation app that you
want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: When using a navigation app, keep
your device unlocked and the app open.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
466
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’ s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
E280315
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
E268570
Once you select a tile, press the
button next to a menu item to
view an explanation of the
feature or setting.
Sound
Select this tile to adjust sound the settings.
Clock
Select this tile to adjust the clock settings.
Bluetooth
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth on and
off and adjust the settings.
Phone
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and
manage the connected device settings.
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings.
Driver Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist
features like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping
System, Pedestrian Detection, and
Auto-Start-Stop.
467
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Vehicle
Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings
like windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKey
settings.
FordPass
Select this tile to adjust the FordPass
settings
General
Select this tile to adjust settings like
language, measurement units, or to reset
the system.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and
off.
Automatic Updates
Select this tile to adjust the automatic
update settings.
Mobile Apps
Select this tile to adjust permissions,
enable, disable, and update mobile apps.
Display
Select this tile to adjust display settings
like brightness and auto dim.
Charge Settings (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the electric vehicle
charge settings.
Voice Control
Select this tile to adjust voice control
settings like command confirmations and
displayed lists.
Navigation (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust navigation settings
like map preferences and route guidance.
Multi Contour Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the position and
massage function of your multi contour
seats.
Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the lumbar
function of your seats.
Message Center (If Equipped)
Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
features when using personal profiles.
Valet Mode (If Equipped)
Select this tile to enable and disable valet
mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
468
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system does not under-
stand what I am saying.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 436).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 436).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it
appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviations
in the name.
The song or artist name may have some special char-
acters that are not being recognized by the system.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-
screen to select and play the track.
469
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-
ations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the contact.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a contact
in the phonebook on my
device and calls the wrong
contact.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. The system applies
phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in the phone-
book on your device. Select the name of the
contact on the touchscreen and use the Hear it
option to get an idea of how the system expects
you to pronounce it.
The system does not under-
stand foreign names of
contacts in the phonebook
on my device.
– Device limitation.
• The system uses text-to-speech technology and
uses a synthetically generated voice rather than
pre-recorded human voice.
The system voice prompts
and the pronunciation of
some words does not seem
to be very accurate.
USB and Bluetooth Audio
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
470
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incorrect device settings.
• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-
install program or active security settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recog-
nize my device.
– Device limitation.
• Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very
hot or very cold weather conditions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
I cannot stream audio from
my Bluetooth device.
– Incompatible device.
• Check the compatibility of your device on our
website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 452).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recog-
nize the music on my device.
– Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example
artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
471
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Copyright protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-
right protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
See Entertainment (page 443).
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 467).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
Sometimes I cannot hear a
track playing on my device.
– Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS
device the audio volume is
set to maximum.
– Device limitation.
• Turn the volume down on your device
If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device
in the correct order, the following information could help:
The system does not play
the tracks on my USB drive
in the correct order.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the
system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sorted
alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the
system has finished indexing, SYNC plays all tracks
sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag
regardless of where they are located. SYNC uses the
file name if the title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from
the browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sorted
alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of
where they are located. SYNC uses the file name if the
title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore
device option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabetically
by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC
then plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder you
have selected.
472
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Phone
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
During a call, I can hear
excessive background noise.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell
phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
– System restart required.
• Restart the system. Switch the ignition off and
open the door. Close the door and lock the vehicle.
Wait until the touchscreen is off and any illumin-
ated USB ports are not illuminated. Unlock the
vehicle, switch the ignition on and try again.
I cannot download phone-
book.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 467).
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
• Check the location of the missing contacts on your
cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, move
them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 467).
A message displays
suggesting that my phone-
book has downloaded but it
is empty or it has missing
contacts.
473
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from system and delete SYNC
from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See
Settings (page 467).
I cannot connect my cell
phone.
Text messaging does not
work.
– You did not switch on text message notifications.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone
(page 452).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Device message sharing is not enabled.
• Check the permissions on your device to ensure
text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
I cannot hear text messages.
474
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Navigation (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot enter a street name
when I am abroad.
– Incorrect entry method.
• Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recog-
nize coordinates.
– You are using the wrong coordinates format.
• Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,
E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if the
direction is West and keep a positive value if the
direction is East, for example 12.5412 means East
and -12.5412 means West.
475
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Apps
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system cannot find any
apps.
– Incompatible device.
• You will need an Android device with OS 4.3 or
higher or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pair
and connect your Android device to find AppLink
compatible apps. Connect your iOS device to a
USB port or pair and connect using Bluetooth.
I have a compatible device
and it is correctly connected
but the system still cannot
find any apps.
– AppLink compatible apps not installed on your device.
• Download and install the latest version of the app.
– AppLink compatible apps not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them
and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device
and allow SYNC to access the app if required.
I have a compatible device,
it is correctly connected and
my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any
apps.
– Apps failed to fully close.
• Restart the apps and try again.
• If you have an Android device with apps that have
an exit or quit option, use this and then restart the
apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the
settings menu on your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 7.0 or higher, tap
the home button on your device twice and then
swipe the app upward to close it.
I have an Android device
that is correctly connected,
I have restarted my apps
and they are running but the
system still cannot find
them.
– An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-
ating system could result in apps not being found.
• Switch Bluetooth off and on again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
476
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I have an iOS device that is
correctly connected, I have
restarted my apps and they
are running but the system
still cannot find them.
– Cable connection issue.
• Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a
moment and then connect it again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
I have an Android device
running a media app which
the system has found but I
cannot hear the sound or
the sound is very quiet.
– Device volume is low.
• Turn the volume up on your device.
I have an Android device
running a number of
compatible apps but the
system cannot find all of
them.
– Device limitation. Some Android devices have a limited
number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to
connect. If you have more apps running on your device
than the number of available Bluetooth ports, the
system cannot find all of them.
• Close some of the apps to allow the system to find
those that you want to use.
477
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Wi-Fi Connectivity
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
478
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see SYNC when I
search for Wi-Fi networks on
my cell phone or other
device.
– System limitation.
• SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You have not set up Personal Profiles.
I cannot create a profile.
You entered an invalid profile.
You did not select a memory button when prompted.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You did not select the lock button on the remote control.
I cannot link a remote
control.
The remote control selected was already associated with
another profile and the system declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a
remote control.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
479
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You are using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do
not save.
A different personal profile is active.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal
profile.
You did not create a personal profile.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You did not link the memory button you are using to a
profile.
You did not link the remote control you are using to a
profile.
You are using the wrong remote control.
You are pressing a button other than the unlock or remote
start on a linked remote control.
You deleted the personal profile.
You switched the personal profiles off.My preset positions recall,
but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my
preset positions do not.
The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-
ously active profile.
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal
Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a remote control.
You erased and reprogrammed the remote controls. This
could happen if you let a dealership add a new remote
control to replace a lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Someone performed a master reset without your know-
ledge.
480
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Resetting the System
1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek up and the audio unit power
buttons until the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
481
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Ford Original
Accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
482
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
483
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
484
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 375).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor system, a message appears in the
information display at the proper oil
change interval. This interval may be up to
one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybrid
vehicles may exceed 10,000 mi
(16,000 km).
485
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 317).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals,
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
We have recommended maintenance
intervals for various parts and component
systems based upon engineering testing.
We rely upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the our
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
486
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
487
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and Example
Interval
1
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
488
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and Example
Interval
1
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Extended engine idling
1
Hybrid vehicles may achieve longer distances between oil changes, but do not exceed
the 1 year max oil change interval. Remaining oil life can be accessed through the
information display. See Information Displays (page 111).
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine coolant level/strength and the hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints - all-wheel drive.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints.
489
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every 3 Years
1
Perform this maintenance item every 3 years. Do not exceed the designated time for the
interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
2
Change the automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
3
Replace the timing belt (1.5L engine).
Change the engine coolant.
4
At 200,000 mi
(322,000 km)
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
3
If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
4
Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every five years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
490
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform
the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD).Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
491
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
492
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
The normal oil change interval for vehicles
operating in the Middle East, North Africa,
Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil
of SM or SN quality is 3,000 mi
(5,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
After the scheduled maintenance services
are performed, record the Repair Order #,
Distance and Engine Hours in the boxes
provided.
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
493
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
494
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
495
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
496
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
497
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
498
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
499
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
500
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
501
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
502
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
503
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
applicable local legislation and other
requirements. Installation of some
aftermarket electronic devices could
degrade the performance of vehicle
functions, which use radio frequency signals
such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
pressure monitoring system, push button
start, Bluetooth connectivity or satellite
navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following illustrations and table. We do not
provide any other special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
Car
E239120
504
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
505
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
506
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
507
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
508
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
509
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
510
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
511
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
512
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
513
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
514
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
515
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
516
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
517
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
518
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
519
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
520
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
521
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
522
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argen-
tina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
523
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
524
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
525
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
526
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
527
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’ s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
528
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
529
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
530
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
531
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
Your vehicle could have components that
transmit and receive radio waves and are
therefore subject to government
regulation.
These components must accept any
interference received, including
interference that could cause undesired
operation. For certification labels and
declarations of conformity, visit
www.wirelessconformity.ford.com.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC 3
Radio Frequency Statement
IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version
216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0
216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1
216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2
532
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
These devices comply with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. The device does not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device accepts any interference
received, including interference that
could cause undesired operation.
533
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Appendices
534
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................137
About This Manual...........................................9
ABS
See: Brakes............................................................215
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................215
Accessories....................................................482
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................16
Active Park Assist........................................229
Using Active Park Assist..................................230
Adaptive Cruise Control............................238
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting............................................246
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering................................245
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go.....................................245
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering................................239
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go.....................................240
Sensor Limitations............................................240
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Lane Centering................................238
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control
With Stop and Go.....................................238
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................239
When Following a Vehicle..............................239
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Troubleshooting........................................246
Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Messages.........................................................246
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................327
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................328
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................327
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................79
Airbag Disposal...............................................52
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................137
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.5L,
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)................319
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)................318
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................78
All-Wheel Drive.............................................210
Ambient Lighting...........................................90
Adjusting the Brightness...................................90
Switching Ambient Lighting Off....................90
Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................90
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................78
Arming the Alarm.................................................78
Disarming the Alarm...........................................78
Appendices...................................................504
Apps.................................................................465
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................466
Using Apps on an Android Device...............465
Using Apps on an iOS Device.......................465
Using Mobile Navigation on an Android
Device...............................................................466
At a Glance.......................................................20
Audible Warnings and Indicators............110
Headlamps On Warning...................................110
Key in Ignition Warning......................................110
Keyless Warning...................................................110
Audio Control...................................................79
You can operate the following functions
with the control:..............................................80
Audio System................................................407
General Information.........................................407
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC
3......................................................................409
Adjusting the Volume.......................................410
Changing Radio Stations................................410
Muting the Audio................................................410
Pausing or Playing Media................................410
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........410
Switching the Display On and Off.................411
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse...............................................................411
535
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC.........407
Accessing the Sound Settings......................407
Adjusting the Volume......................................408
Changing Radio Stations...............................408
Muting the Audio...............................................408
Pausing or Playing Media...............................408
Returning to the Previous Screen...............408
Scrolling Through the Menu Options........408
Selecting a Menu Option...............................409
Selecting Media.................................................408
Selecting the Radio..........................................409
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........409
Switching the Display On and Off..............409
Using a Cell Phone...........................................409
Using Apps..........................................................409
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse............................................................409
Auto Hold.........................................................218
Auto Hold Indicator............................................219
Switching Auto Hold On and Off..................219
Using Auto Hold..................................................219
Autolamps........................................................87
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................87
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)...........................................138
Directing the Airflow..........................................138
Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................139
Setting the Temperature.................................139
Switching Auto Mode On and Off................139
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off.......................................................................140
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off..............................................................140
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off.........................................................................141
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off.........................................................................141
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................140
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................140
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC).................141
Directing the Airflow...........................................141
Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................142
Setting the Temperature..................................142
Switching Auto Mode On and Off................142
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off...............................................................143
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off........................................................................143
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off.......................................................................144
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off........................................................................143
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off........................................................................143
Automatic High Beam Control...................91
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators.........................................................91
Automatic Transmission - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)...........202
Automatic Return to park...............................203
Drive (D)................................................................203
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or
Snow.................................................................206
Low (L)..................................................................203
Manual (M)..........................................................203
Manual Park Release.......................................204
Neutral (N)...........................................................203
Park (P).................................................................202
Reverse (R)..........................................................203
Stay in Neutral Mode.......................................204
Understanding the Shift Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission............................202
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................324
Automatic Transmission - Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV).........................................206
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow.................................................................209
Understanding the Shift Positions of your
Automatic Transmission............................207
Auto-Start-Stop............................................173
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................174
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop...............................173
Autowipers.......................................................83
Autowipers Settings...........................................84
Auxiliary Power Points.................................161
110 Volt AC Power Point....................................161
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................161
536
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Locations................................................................161
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................210
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................325
Blind Spot Information System.............254
Switching the System On and Off..............256
System Errors......................................................256
Using the Blind Spot Information
System..............................................................255
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..........254
Body Styling Kits...........................................341
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............311
Booster Seats..................................................29
Types of Booster Seats......................................30
Brake Fluid Check........................................324
Brake Fluid Service Interval............................325
Brakes................................................................215
General Information..........................................215
Breaking-In.....................................................283
Bulb Specification Chart...........................401
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................146
Canceling the Set Speed...........................237
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................382
Air Conditioning System.................................382
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................385
Automatic Transmission.................................382
Engine Coolant...................................................383
Engine Oil.............................................................384
Fuel Tank..............................................................385
Grease....................................................................385
Hydraulic Brake System..................................386
Locks......................................................................386
Power Transfer Unit..........................................387
Rear Axle...............................................................387
Washer Reservoir..............................................388
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................388
Air Conditioning System.................................388
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................392
Automatic Transmission................................389
Engine Coolant...................................................390
Engine Oil...............................................................391
Fuel Tank...............................................................392
Grease....................................................................392
Hydraulic Brake System..................................393
Locks......................................................................393
Power Transfer Unit..........................................393
Rear Axle...............................................................394
Washer Reservoir...............................................394
Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L,
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)...........395
Air Conditioning System.................................395
Automatic Transmission................................396
Engine Coolant...................................................397
Engine Oil..............................................................397
Fuel Tank..............................................................398
Grease....................................................................398
Hydraulic Brake System..................................398
Locks......................................................................399
Power Transfer Unit..........................................399
Rear Axle..............................................................400
Washer Reservoir..............................................400
Capacities and Specifications................375
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................334
Catalytic Converter.......................................191
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................192
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................192
Changing a Bulb..........................................330
LED Bulbs (If Equipped)..................................331
Replacing Direction Indicator Bulbs............332
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs.............................331
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs...........................330
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs..................................................................333
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs.........333
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly
Bulbs..................................................................333
Changing a Fuse..........................................309
Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................309
537
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Fuse Types............................................................310
General Information.........................................309
Changing a Road Wheel...........................368
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................368
Tire Change Procedure....................................369
Changing the 12V Battery.........................325
Battery Management System.......................327
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.5L,
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)............319
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Excluding: Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV)..........................................................318
Changing the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name or
Password....................................................406
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................329
Front Wiper Blades...........................................329
Rear Window Wiper Blade.............................330
Charging the High Voltage Battery........194
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS.............................................194
Checking MyKey System Status...............63
MyKey Distance....................................................63
Number of Admin Keys......................................64
Number of MyKeys..............................................64
Checking the Wiper Blades......................329
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................41
Child Restraint Positioning..........................31
Child Safety......................................................22
General Information............................................22
Child Safety Locks..........................................33
Left-Hand Side......................................................34
Right-Hand Side...................................................34
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................338
Cleaning Products.......................................334
Materials...............................................................334
Cleaning the Engine....................................336
Cleaning the Exterior..................................334
Cleaning the Headlamps................................335
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................335
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................335
Stripes or Graphics............................................335
Underbody............................................................335
Under Hood..........................................................335
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................337
Cleaning Discolored Area(s) on the
Instrument Panel Surface.........................338
Cleaning the Interior....................................337
Mirrors.....................................................................337
Cleaning the Wheels..................................339
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................336
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................63
Climate Control..............................................137
Collision, Damage or Fire Event.............293
Guidance for Ford Motor Company Electric
and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles Equipped
With High Voltage Batteries.....................293
Connected Vehicle......................................403
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network...........................................................403
Connected Vehicle Limitations..............403
Connected Vehicle Requirements........403
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting.......................................404
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network.......................................................403
Connecting FordPass to the Modem.........403
Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........403
What Is the Modem..........................................403
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network.......................................................403
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check...........................320
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........51
Creating a MyKey............................................62
Programming and Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................63
Creating a Wi-Fi Hotspot.........................406
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot............................................................406
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Password........................................................406
Cross Traffic Alert........................................256
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When Trailer
is Attached......................................................258
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator...........................258
Cross Traffic Alert Information
Messages.........................................................259
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations......................................................258
538
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors............258
Switching the System On and Off..............258
Using Cross Traffic Alert.................................256
Cruise Control...............................................236
Cruise Control Indicators...........................237
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control With Lane
Centering.........................................................81
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control With Stop and Go.........80
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control............................................................80
Customer Assistance.................................296
D
Data Recording..................................................11
Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment
Data.......................................................................13
Event Data................................................................13
Service Data............................................................12
Services That Third Parties Provide...............14
Services That We Provide..................................14
Vehicles With a Modem......................................14
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System..................................................................15
Vehicles With SYNC.............................................14
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps.............................................................88
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)............88
Declaration of Conformity........................532
Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles
With: SYNC 3..............................................532
Radio Frequency Statement.........................532
Digital Radio....................................................411
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting.............................................412
Direction Indicators.......................................89
Direction Indicator...............................................89
Switching the Direction Indicators On and
Off.........................................................................89
Doors and Locks.............................................66
Drive Mode Control.....................................265
Drive Modes.........................................................265
Drive Modes...................................................265
Deep Snow/Sand..............................................265
Eco..........................................................................266
Normal..................................................................266
Slippery.................................................................266
Sport......................................................................266
Driver Alert.....................................................249
Using Driver Alert...............................................249
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45
Children and Airbags..........................................46
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................45
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................49
Driving Aids....................................................249
Driving Hints..................................................283
Driving Through Water..............................284
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps.................................................................88
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)................88
E
Economical Driving.....................................283
Electric Parking Brake.................................216
Applying the Electric Parking Brake.............216
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake...................................................217
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake...................................................................217
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge................................................................217
Electric Vehicle Information....................459
Charge Preferences..........................................463
Charge Settings..................................................461
Charge Time Settings......................................464
Departure Time Settings................................464
Engine On Due To.............................................460
Power Flow..........................................................459
Vehicle Operational States............................459
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............504
Emission Law.................................................190
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance...........191
Tampering With a Noise Control
System..............................................................190
539
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
End User License Agreement..................507
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................507
Engine Block Heater......................................171
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................172
Engine Coolant Check...............................320
Adding Coolant..................................................320
Coolant Change..................................................322
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................323
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................322
Recycled Coolant................................................321
Severe Climates..................................................322
Engine Emission Control...........................190
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76
Engine Oil Check...........................................316
Adding Engine Oil...............................................316
Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................316
Engine Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................375
Drivebelt Routing................................................375
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................375
Drivebelt Routing...............................................376
Engine Specifications - 2.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV)..........................376
Entertainment..............................................443
AM/FM Radio......................................................444
Apps........................................................................452
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................450
CD (If equipped)...............................................450
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available).........................................................447
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................444
Sources..................................................................443
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................452
USB Ports.............................................................452
Environment.....................................................19
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake.............................216
Essential Towing Checks..........................278
Before Towing a Trailer....................................279
Hitches...................................................................278
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................280
Safety Chains......................................................278
Trailer Brakes.......................................................279
Trailer Lamps.......................................................279
Trailer Towing Connector................................278
When Towing a Trailer......................................279
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................11
Export Unique Options.................................18
Exterior Mirrors................................................94
Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................95
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................95
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................94
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................95
Memory Mirrors.....................................................95
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................94
Puddle Lamps ......................................................95
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................95
F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................36
How to Extract Seatbelts in the Rear
Outermost Positions......................................38
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................36
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................368
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................344
Floor Mats......................................................284
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................88
Ford Credit.........................................................15
US Only.....................................................................15
Ford Protect..................................................483
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................484
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................483
Front Fog Lamps............................................88
Front Fog Lamp Indicator.................................89
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On or
Off.........................................................................88
Front Parking Aid.........................................226
Object Distance Indicator...............................227
Front Passenger Sensing System............46
540
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Fuel and Refueling.......................................180
Fuel Consumption.......................................188
Advertised Capacity..........................................188
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................188
Filling the Fuel Tank..........................................188
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................181
Fuel Filter........................................................329
Fuel Quality....................................................180
Choosing the Right Fuel..................................180
Fuel Shutoff...................................................287
Fuses................................................................303
Fuse Specification Chart..........................303
Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................303
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............307
G
Garage Door Opener....................................157
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener............157
Gauges - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV), Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display
Screen...........................................................100
Battery Gauge......................................................102
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge...........101
Fuel Gauge............................................................102
Information Bar....................................................101
Information Display............................................101
Low Fuel Reminder............................................102
Power Gauge........................................................103
Vehicle Driving Range.......................................102
Gauges - Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV), Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display
Screen.............................................................98
Battery Gauge.......................................................99
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........100
Fuel Gauge.............................................................99
Information Bar....................................................99
Information Display...........................................100
Low Fuel Reminder.............................................99
Power Gauge.........................................................99
Vehicle Driving Range.........................................99
Gauges - Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display
Screen...........................................................104
Distance to Empty.............................................106
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........106
Fuel Gauge............................................................105
Information Bar...................................................105
Information Display...........................................105
Low Fuel Reminder............................................105
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display
Screen............................................................103
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........104
Fuel Gauge............................................................104
Information Display...........................................104
Gearbox
See: Transmission.............................................202
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................54
Intelligent Access.................................................54
General Maintenance Information.......485
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................487
Owner Checks and Services.........................486
Protecting Your Investment..........................485
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................485
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................485
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................299
Getting the Services You Need..............296
Away From Home.............................................296
H
Hazard Flashers............................................287
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................327
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................87
Headrest
See: Head Restraints........................................148
Head Restraints............................................148
Folding the Head Restraint.............................150
Front Seat Head Restraints............................149
Installing the Head Restraint.........................150
Lowering the Head Restraint.........................149
Raising the Head Restraint.............................149
Removing the Head Restraint.......................150
Removing the Head Restraints.....................149
Tilting the Front Seat Head Restraint.........150
Head Up Display...........................................134
Adjusting the Head Up Display
Settings.............................................................135
541
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Cleaning the Head Up Display.......................134
Head Up Display Indicator..............................136
Head Up Display Information
Messages..........................................................136
Selecting Which Information the System
Displays.............................................................135
Switching the Head Up Display On or
Off........................................................................134
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................146
Heated Rear Window..................................146
Heated Seats..................................................155
Heated Steering Wheel................................81
Heated Windshield......................................146
Windshield Wiper De-Icer...............................146
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................137
High Voltage Battery...................................194
General Information..........................................194
Hill Start Assist...............................................217
Switching the System On and Off...............218
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................218
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Automatic
Temperature Control................................144
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................145
General Hints.......................................................144
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................145
Quickly Heating the Interior............................144
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........145
Recommended Settings for Heating..........144
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control...........................................................145
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................146
General Hints.......................................................145
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................145
Quickly Heating the Interior............................145
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........145
Recommended Settings for Heating..........145
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods
During Extreme High Ambient
Temperatures..................................................145
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................215
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............311
Horn.....................................................................82
Hybrid Vehicle Frequently Asked
Questions......................................................178
Hybrid Vehicle Operation...........................174
Battery.....................................................................175
Braking....................................................................175
Driving......................................................................175
Driving to Optimize Fuel Economy...............175
Starting...................................................................174
Stopping.................................................................175
Transmission Operation...................................175
I
Ignition Switch...............................................165
In California (U.S. Only).............................297
Information Display Control - Vehicles
With: Head Up Display (HUD)................81
Information Display Control - Vehicles
Without: Head Up Display (HUD)..........81
Information Displays.....................................111
General Information............................................111
Information Messages.................................118
Active Park.............................................................119
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................119
AdvanceTrac™ and Traction Control..........119
Alarm.......................................................................120
Auto-Start-Stop...................................................121
AWD.........................................................................120
Battery and Charging System (12
volt).....................................................................122
Battery and Charging System (High
Voltage).............................................................122
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System....................................................123
Doors and Locks..................................................124
Driver Alert.............................................................125
Fuel...........................................................................125
Hill Start Assist....................................................125
Keys and Intelligent Access............................125
Lane Keeping System.......................................126
Maintenance.........................................................127
MyKey......................................................................128
Park Aid..................................................................128
Park Brake.............................................................129
Power Steering....................................................130
Pre-Collision Assist............................................130
Remote Start.......................................................130
542
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Seats.........................................................................131
Starting System ...................................................131
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................131
Trailer.......................................................................132
Transmission.........................................................132
Installing Child Restraints...........................24
Child Restraints.....................................................24
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................24
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)...........................................26
Using Tether Straps.............................................28
Instrument Cluster........................................98
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................87
Instrument Panel...........................................20
Interior Lamps.................................................89
Interior Lamp Function......................................89
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
Off.........................................................................89
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
On.........................................................................89
Switching the Front Interior Lamps On and
Off.........................................................................90
Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On and
Off.........................................................................90
Interior Mirror...................................................95
Automatic Dimming Mirror..............................96
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................96
Introduction........................................................9
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle - Excluding:
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV)...........288
Connecting the Jumper Cables ...................288
Preparing Your Vehicle....................................288
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................289
Starting the Engine...........................................289
Jump Starting the Vehicle - Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV).........................290
Connecting the Jumper Cables ....................291
Preparing Your Vehicle....................................290
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................292
Starting the Engine...........................................292
K
Keyless Entry...................................................69
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................69
Keyless Starting............................................165
Ignition Modes.....................................................166
Keys and Remote Controls.........................54
L
Lane Keeping System................................250
Switching the System On and Off................251
Liftgate................................................................71
Lighting Control..............................................86
Flashing High Beam Headlamps....................87
Lighting Control Selections..............................86
Switching High Beam Headlamps On and
Off.........................................................................86
Lighting..............................................................86
General Information...........................................86
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............268
Load Carrying................................................267
Load Limit......................................................269
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................273
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................269
Locking and Unlocking................................66
Activating Intelligent Access............................67
Autolock..................................................................68
Battery Saver.........................................................69
Illuminated Entry..................................................68
Illuminated Exit.....................................................69
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................66
Opening a Rear Door from the Inside...........67
Power Door Locks................................................66
Remote Control....................................................66
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................68
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................68
Luggage Covers............................................267
Installing the Luggage Cover........................268
Removing the Luggage Cover........................267
543
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Stowing the Luggage Cover..........................268
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................368
M
Maintenance....................................................311
General Information...........................................311
Manual Climate Control.............................137
Directing the Airflow..........................................137
Setting the Blower Motor Speed...................137
Setting the Temperature..................................137
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off...............................................................138
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off.......................................................................138
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off.......................................................................138
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off........................................................................137
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................138
Manual Liftgate................................................71
Closing the Liftgate...............................................71
Opening with the Outside Control
Button...................................................................71
Opening with the Remote Control..................71
Manual Seats..................................................151
Adjusting the Seat Backrest............................151
Adjusting the Seat Height................................151
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward..............................................................151
Memory Function..........................................153
Saving a PreSet Position..................................153
Message Center
See: Information Displays..................................111
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors................................93
Mobile Communications Equipment.......17
Moonroof..........................................................96
Bounce-Back..........................................................97
Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............97
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™.......377
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................378
Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L, Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV)..........................................379
MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................64
MyKey™..............................................................61
Principle of Operation.........................................61
N
Navigation......................................................454
Changing the Format of the Map................456
cityseeker.............................................................458
Michelin Travel Guide.......................................459
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates............................................................459
Route Guidance.................................................456
Setting a Destination.......................................455
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................459
Zoom......................................................................456
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........488
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................488
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................489
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................317
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................316
Opening and Closing the Hood................311
Closing the Hood.................................................312
Information Messages......................................312
Opening the Hood...............................................311
Warning Lamps and Indicators......................312
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................301
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........301
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control.............................................................92
Overriding the Set Speed.........................244
P
Parking Aids...................................................224
Principle of Operation......................................224
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................76
SecuriLock®...........................................................76
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76
Pedestrian Alert System..............................53
Pedestrian Protection...................................53
Perchlorate........................................................15
544
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Personalized Settings..................................116
Fuel Economy........................................................117
Hybrid Information...............................................117
Trip 1 and 2..............................................................117
Personal Safety System™..........................43
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................43
Phone...............................................................452
Android Auto.......................................................454
Apple CarPlay.....................................................454
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................452
Text Messaging...................................................453
Using Your Cell Phone.....................................453
Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Operation...........176
Electric Vehicle (EV) Modes...........................176
Low Engine Use...................................................178
Post-Crash Alert System..........................294
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................66
Power Liftgate..................................................72
Hands-Free Feature.............................................74
Obstacle Detection..............................................74
Opening and Closing the Liftgate...................72
Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................73
Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................73
Switching the Power Liftgate On or
Off..........................................................................74
Power Seats....................................................152
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................153
Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................152
Adjusting the Seat Cushion.............................152
Adjusting the Seat Height................................152
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................152
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................325
Power Windows..............................................93
Accessory Delay...................................................94
Bounce-Back.........................................................93
One-Touch Down.................................................93
One-Touch Up.......................................................93
Rear Window Lock...............................................93
Pre-Collision Assist....................................260
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................262
Blocked Sensors................................................263
Distance Indication and Alert.........................261
Evasive Steering Assist....................................262
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System.............................................................260
Protecting the Environment........................19
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................368
R
Rear Parking Aid...........................................224
Object Distance Indicator...............................226
Rear Seat Armrest........................................164
Rear Seats.......................................................154
Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................155
Folding the Seat Backrest...............................155
Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward.............................................................154
Unfolding the Seat Backrest..........................155
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................267
Adjustable Load Floor......................................267
Cargo Management System..........................267
Rear View Camera.......................................232
Using the Rear View Camera System........233
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................232
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........85
Rear Camera Washer.........................................85
Rear Window Washer.........................................85
Rear Window Wiper............................................85
Recommended Towing Weights............276
Refueling - Excluding: Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric
Vehicle (PHEV)..........................................183
Refueling System Overview...........................183
Refueling System Warning.............................185
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................183
Refueling - Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(PHEV)..........................................................185
Fuel Filler Door Manual Override
Lever....................................................................187
System Warnings................................................187
Remote Control..............................................54
Car Finder................................................................58
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter....................54
Intelligent Access Key.........................................55
Linking a Preset Position to Your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key..............60
Memory Feature...................................................60
545
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Remote Start.........................................................59
Replacing the Battery.........................................56
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................58
Remote Start..................................................147
Automatic Settings............................................147
Heated and Cooled Features..........................147
Last Settings.........................................................147
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............339
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................16
Collision Repairs....................................................16
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................16
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................16
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................60
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................301
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................301
Resuming the Set Speed...........................237
Resuming the Set Speed from a Complete
Stop...................................................................244
Roadside Assistance..................................286
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................287
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................286
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................286
Roadside Emergencies.............................286
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................268
Adjusting the Crossbars..................................269
Maximum Recommended Load
Amounts..........................................................269
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................283
Running Out of Fuel.....................................181
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................182
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................181
S
Safety Canopy™............................................50
Safety Precautions......................................180
Satellite Radio...............................................413
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN).................................................................414
Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............414
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................414
Troubleshooting..................................................415
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........493
Scheduled Maintenance..........................485
Seatbelt Extensions.......................................41
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38
Seatbelt Reminder........................................39
Seatbelt Status....................................................40
Seatbelts...........................................................35
Principle of Operation.........................................35
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................39
Conditions of operation.....................................39
Seats.................................................................148
Security..............................................................76
Selecting a Drive Mode..............................265
Settings...........................................................467
911 Assist..............................................................468
Ambient Lighting...............................................468
Audio......................................................................467
Automatic Updates..........................................468
Bluetooth..............................................................467
Charge Settings.................................................468
Clock.......................................................................467
Display...................................................................468
Driver Assist.........................................................467
FordPass...............................................................468
General.................................................................468
Message Center.................................................468
Mobile Apps........................................................468
Multi Contour Seats.........................................468
Navigation............................................................468
Personal Profiles...............................................468
Phone.....................................................................467
Seats......................................................................468
Sound.....................................................................467
Valet Mode..........................................................468
Vehicle...................................................................468
Voice Control......................................................468
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Gap.................................................................243
Following a Vehicle...........................................244
546
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed............................................................242
Manually Changing the Set Speed.............243
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed from a
Complete Stop...............................................243
Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........236
Changing the Set Speed.................................236
Side Airbags.....................................................48
Side Sensing System..................................228
Object Distance Indicator...............................229
Sitting in the Correct Position..................148
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................363
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................368
Special Notices................................................16
New Vehicle Limited Warranty........................16
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles.........................................17
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................17
Special Instructions.............................................16
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance.............17
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............17
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................491
Exceptions............................................................492
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................236
Stability Control............................................222
Principle of Operation......................................222
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................165
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................166
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................167
Failure to Start.....................................................167
Fast Restart...........................................................167
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...............168
Important Ventilating Information..............168
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................168
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................168
Starting a Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System..........................................................169
Automatic Shutdown........................................170
Fast Restart..........................................................169
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................171
Important Ventilating Information................171
Switching Off Your Vehicle When It Is
Moving................................................................170
Switching Off Your Vehicle When It Is
Stationary.........................................................170
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........165
General Information..........................................165
Steering...........................................................259
Electric Power Steering...................................259
Steering Wheel................................................79
Storage Compartments.............................164
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................96
Sun Visors.........................................................96
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................96
Supplementary Restraints System.........44
Principle of Operation........................................44
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
and Off..........................................................242
Automatic Cancellation or
Deactivation....................................................242
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................242
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.......................................................................242
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off......................................................91
Activating the Automatic High Beam
Control..................................................................91
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off..................................................................236
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................236
Switching Cruise Control On.........................236
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
to Cruise Control.......................................245
Switching Lane Centering On and
Off...................................................................245
Activating Lane Centering..............................246
System Alerts and Automatic
Cancellation...................................................246
Symbols Glossary.............................................9
SYNC™ 3........................................................434
General Information.........................................434
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................469
Additional Information and
Assistance........................................................481
Apps........................................................................476
Navigation.............................................................475
547
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Personal Profiles................................................479
Phone.....................................................................473
Resetting the System.......................................481
USB and Bluetooth Audio..............................470
Voice Recognition.............................................469
Wi-Fi Connectivity.............................................478
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......421
911 Assist................................................................421
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................423
SYNC™.............................................................417
General Information...........................................417
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................425
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............375
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................298
Tire Care..........................................................350
Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................352
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................350
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................353
Temperature A B C.............................................351
Traction AA A B C................................................351
Treadwear..............................................................351
Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................344
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........364
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................365
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................366
Tire Repair Kit
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit................344
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................344
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air.......................................346
General Information.........................................345
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure...........................................................348
Tips for Use of the Kit......................................345
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed...............................................................348
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured........346
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................342
Towing a Trailer.............................................275
Load Placement.................................................275
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
8-Speed Automatic Transmission –
8F24..............................................................280
Emergency Towing...........................................280
Recreational Towing........................................280
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
8-Speed Automatic Transmission –
8F35...............................................................281
Emergency Towing.............................................281
Recreational Towing..........................................281
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
Automatic Transmission – HF45.........281
Emergency Towing.............................................281
Recreational Towing..........................................281
Towing..............................................................275
Traction Control.............................................221
Principle of Operation.......................................221
Trailer Sway Control....................................276
Transmission Code Designation.............381
Transmission.................................................202
Transporting the Vehicle...........................295
U
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................313
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................314
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L, Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (HEV)/Plug-In Hybrid
Electric Vehicle (PHEV)...........................315
Unique Driving Characteristics.................173
Universal Garage Door Opener................157
HomeLink Wireless Control System............157
USB Port..........................................................416
Locating the USB Ports....................................416
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................210
Driving in Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive..............................................210
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................64
Using Snow Chains.....................................363
Using Stability Control...............................223
Using Summer Tires...................................363
548
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................424
Audio Voice Commands.................................425
Media Sources....................................................424
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............420
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu...................................................................421
Pairing a Phone..................................................420
Phone Controls....................................................421
Phone Voice Commands...............................420
Using Traction Control................................221
Switching the System Off................................221
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................221
Using a Switch......................................................221
Using the Information Display
Controls.............................................................221
Using Voice Recognition............................418
Audio Voice Commands..................................437
Climate Voice Commands.............................438
Initiating a Voice Session.................................418
Mobile App Voice Commands.......................441
Navigation Voice Commands.......................440
Phone Voice Commands................................438
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands......................................................441
System Interaction and Feedback...............419
Voice Settings Commands............................442
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................299
V
Vehicle Care...................................................334
General Information.........................................334
Vehicle Certification Label........................381
Vehicle Identification Number...............380
Vehicle Storage............................................339
Body........................................................................339
Brakes....................................................................340
Cooling system..................................................340
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery............340
Engine....................................................................340
Fuel system.........................................................340
General..................................................................339
Miscellaneous......................................................341
Plugging in Your HYBRID................................340
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................341
Tires........................................................................340
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................137
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...........380
Voice Control...................................................80
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...............106
Adaptive Cruise Control..................................106
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................106
Auto Hold Active.................................................106
Auto Hold Unavailable......................................107
Automatic High Beam Control......................106
Auto-Start-Stop..................................................107
Battery....................................................................107
Blind Spot Monitor.............................................107
Brake System Warning Lamp.........................107
Cruise Control.......................................................107
Direction Indicator..............................................107
Door Ajar................................................................107
Electric Park Brake..............................................107
Engine Oil..............................................................108
Engine or Motor Coolant
Temperature...................................................108
EV Charge.............................................................108
EV Later.................................................................108
EV Now..................................................................108
Fasten Rear Seatbelt........................................108
Fasten Seatbelt..................................................108
Front Airbag.........................................................108
Front Fog Lamps................................................108
High Beam............................................................108
Hood Ajar..............................................................108
Lamps On.............................................................108
Liftgate Ajar..........................................................108
Low Beam Warning...........................................109
Low Fuel Level.....................................................109
Low Tire Pressure Warning.............................109
Low Washer Fluid...............................................109
Powertrain Fault.................................................109
Ready to Drive.....................................................109
Service Engine Soon.........................................109
Stability Control..................................................109
Stability Control Off..........................................109
Stop Safely Now..................................................110
Vehicle Plugged in...............................................110
549
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
Washer Fluid Check....................................329
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................334
See: Wipers and Washers.................................83
Waxing.............................................................336
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Lane Centering..........................................238
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With
Stop and Go................................................238
What Is Automatic High Beam
Control.............................................................91
What Is Cruise Control...............................236
What Is Drive Mode Control....................265
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................368
Wheels and Tires.........................................342
General Information.........................................342
Technical Specifications.................................374
Wi-Fi Hotspot...............................................406
Windows and Mirrors....................................93
Windshield Washers.....................................84
Front Camera Washer........................................85
Windshield Wipers........................................83
Intermittent Wipe.................................................83
Speed Dependent Wipers................................83
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................329
Wipers and Washers.....................................83
Wireless Accessory Charging...................162
550
Escape (CTC) Canada/United States of America, Vehicles Built From: 17-06-2019, enUSA, Edition date: 201906, Second-Printing
Index
